Revit MEP

Metric Tutorial

25703-050000-5080A

2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. IES <Virtual Environment>, IES <VE> Copyright© 2007 by Integrated Environmental Solutions Limited Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Performing an Energy Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Resolving Routing Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 . 214 . 219 . 223 . 225 . 228

Contents | v

Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 228 . 234 . 239 . 244 . 245 . 250 . 255 . 260 . 264 . 270 . 275 . 282 . 282 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 289 . 296 . 306 . 312 . 317 . 323 . 330 . 336 . 336 . 340 . 364 . 403 . 409

Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Part 2

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 . 422 . 425 . 431 . 436 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 446 . 447 . 450 . 456 . 456 . 459 . 463 . 465 . 470 . 470 . 475 . 479 . 482 . 482

Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

vi | Contents

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 487 . 489 . 491 . 493 . 499 . 502 . 505 . 505 . 506 . 509 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 525 . 525 . 531 . 533 . 537 . 540 . 541 . 548 . 548 . 554 . 558 . 560 . 562 . 564 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 572 . 588 . 588 . 593 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 597 . 602 . 602 . 604 . 606 . 607 . 609 . 609 . 610 . 611

Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Contents | vii

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Part 3

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 . 634 . 637 . 643 . 645 . 647 . 647 . 649 . 650 . 651 . 656 . 656 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 668 . 668 . 670 . 674 . 675 . 677 . 677 . 680 . 682 . 686 . 686 . 687 . 689 . 692 . 692 . 693 . 694 . 694 . 697 . 698 . 698 . 700 . 701 . 704 . 704 . 709 . 709 . 711 . 713 . 716 . 716 . 718 . 721 . 721 . 725

Chapter 12 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Chapter 15 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . .

viii | Contents

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 727 . 730 . 732 . 739 . 739 . 746 . 750

Part 4

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753

Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756

Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 . 760 . 765 . 768 . 770 . 773 . 774 . 775 . 782 . 784 . 789 . 801 . 804 . 808 . 808 . 815 . 818 . 827 . 833 . 836 . 838 . 838 . 840 . 842 . 842 . 842 . 843 . 844 . 845 . 846 . 848 . 850 . 850 . 852 . 852 . 854 . 855 . 855 . 858 . 866 . 868 . 868 . 874

Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 880 . 881 . 884 . 884 . 890 . 894 . 897 . 900 . 900 . 902 . 905 . 914 . 914 . 915 . 919 . 919 . 923 . 928 . 933 . 935 . 935 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 945 . 945 . 946

Part 5

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 . 952 . 956 . 958 . 960 . 963 . 965 . 966 . 967 . 969 . 970 . 971 . 972

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Part 6

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Chapter 20 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

x | Contents

Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 1003 . 1003 . 1004 . 1008 . 1011 . 1013 . 1015 . 1016 . 1018

Contents | xi

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you use the default template and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select Systems-Default_Metric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit MEP is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2008?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit MEP uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.
■ ■

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■

Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit MEP, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit MEP. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit MEP classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some

Understanding the Basics | 7

or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit MEP 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. Navigating the User Interface | 9 .In the following illustration. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. This creates a new project based on the default template. In addition. click . By default. In the steps that follow. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. the user interface is labeled.

and click. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. click the command name to start the command. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. notice a door type is specified. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Edit. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. To choose commands. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. On the left side of the Options Bar. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. Then. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. place the cursor over the menu name. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. TIP For example. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. While working in the drawing area. and View. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. click Toolbar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

Navigating the User Interface | 11 . notice the list of walls that are available. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. First. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. For example. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. if you intend to add a door. If you select the Door tool. You use the Type Selector in two ways. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Within the drawing area. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. 9 In the Type Selector.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: Includes commands for creating most basic building model components. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. Drafting tab: Commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents. Rendering tab: Commands for creating rendered 3D images. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. containing buttons grouped by function. View tab: Commands for creating different views in the project. ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Modelling tab: All the commands to create model elements. immediately below the Type Selector. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. 11 Click OK. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

and rename views. walls. sheets. family category (doors.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: Commands for adding site components and producing site plans. windows). The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. Massing tab: Commands for executing conceptual massing commands. reports. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. select Views (all). Navigating the User Interface | 13 . Room and Area tab: Commands for making room and area schemes and plans. click the tab. elevations. families. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. and group name. 3D). schedules. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. Construction tab: Includes commands for creating construction industry information. Structural tab: Commands for adding structural components to your project. and groups. families. In the Project Browser. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. To access the commands within a tab. delete.

The cursor is displayed as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Cancel. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. click Wall. double-click the name. After you create a browser organization scheme. The browser is dockable. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. Do not click. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. ■ 13 In the Type Selector.■ ■ To open a view.

it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. In this case. When you place the cursor over a component. regarding selected components within a view. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. in conjunction with Tooltips. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.In the bottom left corner of the window. In the Status Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Press TAB. click Modify. Revit MEP 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2008 Help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. The Status Bar also provides information. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view.

You can use this tri-pane. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can also press SHIFT+F1. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. Windows: From any window. If there is no Help button displayed. Click the Help button. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. find a keyword on the Index tab. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. There are several tools that help you find information. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. For example. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP In this exercise. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. click . Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command.rvt. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open.

The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. 8 Click in the drawing area. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 17 . 5 Click Zoom Out (2x).The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.

as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. display along the ends. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. When drawing or modifying a building model. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. Without clicking in the dialog. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. Cnst. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. Similar controls. bottoms. 14 Enter ZR. and select the wall. expand Floor Plans. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. referred to as shape handles. on the View toolbar. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. roll the wheel to zoom the view. Small blue dots. expand Views (all). To modify or add snap increments. called drag controls.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. click Zoom. press and hold CTRL. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. On a wheel mouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. These are the drag controls. and double-click 2nd Flr. and drag the cursor. click . To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. If you do not have a wheel mouse.

Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. click (Move). click to specify the starting position.15 Click and drag the left control. to lengthen the wall. In this case. and click again to specify the ending position. you want to move the table closer to the wall. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. for example. require two clicks to complete the command. Some commands. such as Move and Copy. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. After selecting the element to be moved. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 19 . and on the Edit toolbar.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. select the second item in the list. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to . as shown. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. and drag it on top of the table. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions.20 Click next to the lower wall. In this example. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant. 23 On the Undo menu.

Some commands. click the Undo command. click Lines. click Modify. On the Design Bar. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Press ESC twice. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. on the Standard toolbar. 26 To end the command. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. such as the Lines command. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit MEP | 21 .

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. However. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. By following the recommended workflow. If the tutorial datasets are not present. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This workflow begins with systems planning and design. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. This system consist of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. 23 . methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. As you create the mechanical system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. At the end of this tutorial. go to http://www. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient.Mechanical Systems 2 In this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2008. and concludes with documenting your design and exporting your design. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.

you create separate views in which to work with zones. 3 Enter 2 . and click OK 3 times. 5 After the Project Parameters dialog opens. and double-click Level 2. Open the m Zones. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.Planning Mechanical Systems Creating a mechanical system in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. After you create these views. Notice that the new Rooms group is selected for the parameter group. planning is critical to a successful design. The shared parameter file is saved as a text file. select Rooms. you refer back to the views to verify zone information. Zones allow you to better analyze and control the heating and cooling of the space. and enter Zone for Name in the Parameter Properties dialog. you copy the room tags from the level 2 architectural floor plan to the level 2 mechanical HVAC floor plan.Mech. under Categories.Mech. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. however. click the Training Files icon. Copy room tags 12 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. click Add.Mech Zones for Name. you create a shared project parameter. click New. click Yes. 13 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. right-click the view named 2 . you create zones for the rooms on the first and second floors. navigate to the folder of your choice. Create a new floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and name the new parameter group Rooms. 10 Under Parameters. click Create. First. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog. right-click Copy of 2 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click OK. Create a shared project parameter 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. A new view called Copy of 2 . and click OK twice. Later in the design process.Mech is created and becomes the active view (it is in boldface). 2 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones In this exercise. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Groups. select Shared parameter for Parameter Type. and click Save. This allows you to easily identify the rooms when assigning zones. 24 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In this lesson. When prompted to choose a shared parameter file. click New. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. enter Office for File name. and then you use this parameter to assign each zone to a room. and click Select. you plan the system by first creating zones and then performing an energy analysis on the building space to determine heating and cooling requirements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. Next.

All level 2 room tags are pasted into the view. click to filter the selected elements. 18 Click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. TIP Notice that by selecting Paste Aligned. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range are selected. double-click 2 . 17 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones | 25 . 14 On the Options Bar. under Mechanical. 16 Press CTRL+C to copy the selection. all room tags are automatically aligned based on their original placement. All level 2 room tags are selected. If you had selected Paste from Clipboard (CTRL+V). 15 In the Filter box.Mech Zones to make it the active view. In this case. and then select Room Tags.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. and click OK. click Check None. you would have needed to manually align the selection. only mechanical elements are selected because the view discipline has been specified as Mechanical.

Office 27 Office 26 Lounge 25 Open 2 Ladies’ Room 23 Men’s Room 22 Zone zone 1 zone 2 zone 3 zone 4 zone 5 zone 6 zone 7 zone 8 zone 9 zone 10 zone 11 zone 12 zone 13 26 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . select the first room component. TIP You can easily identify the room component by the diagonal lines that display after placing the cursor in the room. 21 Assign zones to the remaining Level 2 rooms according to the table below.Mech Zones view. Room Component Room Tag 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.Assign zones to the level 2 rooms 19 In the 2 . use the Element Properties dialog to assign the zone. and select each additional room component. TIP To assign the same zone to more than one room. Note that the Office 6 room tag is not the room component but a room tag (annotation). and click (Properties). To clear a selection. under Other. You have assigned zone 1 to Office 6. press Ctrl. Then. press SHIFT and select the room component to clear. Level 2 Room Name Office 6 Office 7 Office 8 Office 33 Office 32 Conference Room 31 Office 29 Office 28. enter zone 1 for Zone. select the Office 6 room component.

In the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. 23 In the 1 . Office 16 Office 14. 25 In the Save As dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using room schedules or accessing element properties. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Mech Zones view. However.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you assigned zones to the level 1 and level 2 rooms. assign zones to the rooms according to the following table: Level 1 Room Name Office 3 Office 4. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. Office 13 Office 12 Office 11 Office 10. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. Open the m Zones Color Scheme. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Office 9 Open 1 Ladies’ Room 20 Men’s Room 19 Zone zone 14 zone 15 zone 16 zone 17 zone 18 zone 19 zone 20 zone 21 zone 22 zone 23 zone 24 24 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 27 . you created new views by duplicating and renaming existing views. Copy the room tags from the Level 1 architectural floor plan and paste them (using Paste Aligned) into the 1 .Mech Zones view. You then copied room tags into the new views. Using this project parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Zones Training for File name. do the following: ■ ■ Create a new mechanical HVAC view based on 1 . you define a color scheme and assign it to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. and click Save. you assign color scheme to these newly assigned zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system.Assign zones to level 1 rooms 22 Using the methods that you just learned. Office 5 Office 18 Office 17.Mech and name it 1 . click the Training Files icon.Mech Zones. and created a shared project parameter. click File menu ➤ Save.

Verify that By value is selected. This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. Next. Apply the color scheme 9 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. and on the Options Bar. In the Type Selector. enter HVAC. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is now the current color scheme legend type. You applied the color scheme but it is based on room number. ■ Colors are automatically assigned to the 24 zones that you previously defined. click Duplicate to create a new color scheme legend type based on the existing one. click the Edit/New button. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar.Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and double-click 2 . click (Properties). 14 Click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. 4 On the Options Bar. Modify the color scheme 12 Select the color scheme legend. select Zone. and click OK after a message informs you that colors are not preserved when changing a parameter. do the following: ■ For Color. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you modify the color scheme so that it is based on zones. right-click the Design Bar. 8 Click OK twice.Mech Zones to make it the active view. and click to place the legend. TIP You can also right-click. and click OK. select Number for Color Scheme. under Scheme Definition. and click Drafting. 10 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. 7 For Name. and click OK. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.

18 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK twice. click Edit Color Scheme. Because you specified a color scheme based on zones. so you will need to assign a color scheme to this view. 21 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. select Number for Color Scheme. The color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. double-click 1 .Mech Zones view. The color scheme legend that you defined for level 2 is automatically applied. Also note that elevations have been hidden in the view to enhance legend visibility. click the color scheme legend. click Color Scheme Legend. Notice that the color for zone 22 (Open 1) is similar to that of zone 15 (Offices 4 and 5) and needs to be changed for visual clarity. Notice that the HVAC color scheme legend that you previously created is selected in the Type Selector. 15 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Color dialog. and click the associated color. under Basic Colors. each room displays the color that is associated with its zone. NOTE Rooms that do not have zones assigned to them display as white. Next. 17 Position and insert the color scheme legend along the right side of the floor plan as you did in the 2 .Mech Zones to make it the active view. This is because color schemes are view specific. 19 In the drawing area. you create and modify the color scheme for level 1. select color RGB 255-255-128 (a light yellow color). 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. scroll down to Value 22 (zone 22). and verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected in the Type Selector.The modified color scheme displays. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones | 29 . and click OK.

click Compute room volumes. 30 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . verify that Office is selected. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. NOTE This setting must be configured to perform an accurate energy analysis. Specify room and area settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Room and Area Settings. You also edited a color scheme for visual clarity. During an energy analysis. click Heating and Cooling Loads. Performing an Energy Analysis In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. verify that Compute room volumes is selected. you perform an energy analysis on the building to evaluate energy loads. 23 If you want to save your work.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Energy Analysis. you perform an energy analysis to estimate building energy usage. you defined a new color scheme and applied it to the rooms in your building according to the zone that you previously assigned each room. and click OK. 4 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 2 On the Calculations tab of the Room and Area Settings dialog. 24 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. Verify building information 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. enter Zones Color Scheme Training for File name.Zone 22 (Open 1) displays the new color. click the Training Files icon. and click Mechanical. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. In this exercise. if you receive warnings indicating that the compute room volumes option is not checked and the output will be approximate. and do the following: ■ For Building Type.

You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information. you view various rooms in the building. Performing an Energy Analysis | 31 . ■ ■ (Browser Building For Building Service (Default Room Service). 6 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Energy Analysis. 7 Select Level 1 for Level. spin the view to verify the rooms (energy surfaces) in the building. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the building information as project information. 8 Select 16 Office. Each level that contains at least one room is listed under Level.You can also select all levels that contain at least one room to list all of the rooms in the building. notice that the rooms in the building display. Next. verify that VAV . In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling dialog.■ For Building Construction. You have verified the building information. View rooms 5 While pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. For Place and Location. you need to view specific rooms. verify that Boston. MA is selected. Next. click the Rooms tab. Then. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). 9 Click (Highlight).Single Duct is selected. verify that <Building> is selected. Rooms are then listed for the selected level. click Edit for Energy Data.

12 On the View Selector. The View Selector is located at the bottom left corner of the preview pane. 13 Select Level 2 for Level. select a different room or multiple rooms on a level to highlight them. or SHIFT-select a range of rooms. pan. 10 With the Highlight tool active. click (Shading) to shade the room in blue.The Office 16 highlights in red. 14 Click (Isolate). you can select Wireframe or Shading for model graphics style. If you select Shading. You can also view a room in relation to the other rooms or architecture in the entire building. Remember that you may need to spin the view to see a selected room in the model. 32 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and zoom) the view in the preview pane as you can in the drawing window or you can use your mouse. you isolate a room. TIP You can select multiple rooms by pressing CTRL-selecting them. Also note that you click to dynamically modify (spin. You can also press CTRL+A to select all rooms on a level. the rooms display in blue. Next. 11 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Highlighting rooms allows you to verify that the room boundaries are as you defined them. and then select 25 Lounge. NOTE Using the View Selector.

16 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.The Lounge on level 2 displays while all other rooms are hidden. This indicates that the information in the building type named <Building> will be used for the Office 3 energy analysis. and clicking Element Properties. Perform an energy analysis and view the report 20 Click Calculate. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you verify room information. Revit MEP performs the building calculations for heating and cooling in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). and Room Service. 15 With the Isolate tool active. or room service values. 19 Using the methods that you learned. Verify room information 17 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. TIP If you select multiple rooms that have different room type. select Office 3 on Level 1. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and room information to the IES <VE> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. Make your room information selections based on your specifications. verify the room information for the other rooms in the building. you can perform an energy analysis. After the energy analysis is completed. The room information is located under Energy Analysis. these values on the Room tab will be blank. right-clicking. room construction. 18 Verify that <Building> is selected for Room Type. You can also access the room information by selecting a room in the drawing area. select a different room or rooms on any level to isolate that them. IMPORTANT Revit MEP stores the room information as room properties. Now that the building and room information has been verified. Room Construction. Performing an Energy Analysis | 33 . or import the IES model that has already been created. and the Loads Report Summary displays. Next. Isolating a room allows you to easily verify rooms that normally would be obstructed by other rooms and difficult to view normally.

you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. you create new views.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Create and modify a new ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Select Level 1 for Underlay. and viewed room to verify room boundaries. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. You can also select the 1 . you specified building and room information. including the Project Information. click File menu ➤ Save. Then. and double-click 1 . Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals.Ceiling Mech to make it the active view. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Weather Data. In this lesson. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. In the next lesson. adding AC units. 34 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you will create supply air systems. sizing ductwork. and validate your air system design. After system creation. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties). and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. NOTE You must perform a new energy analysis each time you change building or room parameters. and click View Properties. under Graphics. You then performed an energy analysis on your building and viewed an energy analysis report. and Room Summary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 If you want to save your work. In this exercise. 23 In the Save As dialog. modify air terminal parameters. click the Training Files icon. After completing the air systems lesson. and click Save. Open the m Air Terminals. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the rooms.21 Review the Loads Report Summary.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice.

verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. click Modify. 6 Click OK twice. and press Tab. NOTE When entering a value. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. the command in progress terminates. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . Placing Air Terminals | 35 . You specify 2615mm so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 2600mm) and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. and enter 2615 for Offset. for the Cut plane parameter. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. for the Level parameter.Ceiling Mech is the active view. ■ ■ Under Primary Range.200 Neck. 11 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. click Air Terminal. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 12 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. enter 0 for Offset. and enter 2615 mm for Offset. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. and click to place the supply air terminal as shown. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Under View Depth.Round Connection : M_600x600 . TIP When you click Modify. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. for the Top parameter. For example. enter the value. 10 Move your cursor to the upper left corner of the view. You can also press Esc to accomplish this.5 In the View Range dialog.

This is also the ceiling height for all rooms. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.13 On the Options Bar. under Constraints. This places the air terminal with an 2600mm offset from level 1. the air terminal will be placed in the ceiling. and then click . 36 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . TIP To use the Move tool. enter 2600 for Offset. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. and after the mid point snap displays. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. click to specify the move start point. and click OK. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. move the cursor in Office 3 located in the upper left corner of the floor plan. click the center mid point of the ceiling grid to specify the move end point as shown. Thus. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. 17 In the drawing area. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. enter 150 L/s for Flow.

verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected.The air terminal is placed. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination). then select Multiple. Placing Air Terminals | 37 . 19 On the Options Bar. and then click the center mid point of the Office 4 and then of the Office 5 ceiling grids to specify copy end points. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 3 air terminal selected. Notice that the air terminal start point and end point align.

TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display mid point snaps only. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. 22 In the Type Selector. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). Notice that after you specify the copy start point. 23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. click Air Terminal. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. listening dimensions display to aid placement. 38 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

place 3 return air terminals in the open office (Open 1) to the left of the restrooms. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 120 L/s and the offset to 2600mm. Placing Air Terminals | 39 . select M_Return Air Diffuser : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. and specify a 150 L/s airflow for each of them.Before you move the exhaust grill. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Using the same placement method and offset parameter (2600mm).

click Modify. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 3 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. right-click. Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout 30 Select the Office 3 air terminal. click on the Edit toolbar.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 40 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click OK. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. clear the UpFlowArrow check box. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

After you place the supply air terminals. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. 33 If you want to save your work. Placing Air Terminals | 41 . Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. and 120 L/s airflow for the exhaust diffusers. and click Save. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. Specify the same 2600mm offset parameter for all air terminals as you did for level 1. click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. You will be using different views to design the systems. 34 In the Save As dialog. do the following for level 2: ■ ■ Make 2 . specify the same view parameters as 1 .Ceiling Mech the active view.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. In the Element Properties dialog. enter Air Terminals Training for File name. Create the level 2 air terminal layout 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1. Specify 150 L/s airflow for the supply and return diffusers.

you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. under Available fields. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. In the next exercise. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with rooms. Click OK. you create the air systems. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. More importantly. 5 While pressing Ctrl. In this exercise. select Air Terminals. In the next exercise. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. modified the air terminal parameters. click the Training Files icon. select Room. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. 4 Under Select available fields from. and learned a method for precise placement. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. do the following: ■ Under Category. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 7 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Number Room: Name Flow Room: Actual Supply Airflow 42 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. and select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Room: Actual Supply Airflow Room: Calculated Supply Airflow Room: Name Room: Number 6 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. select Flow. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In this exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Open the m Air System Schedules.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Format the calculated value parameter 11 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and Totals only. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Check Supply Airflow is selected for Field. NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim including spaces. 12 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Create a calculated value parameter 8 Click Calculated Value. 9 In the Calculated Value dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Room: Number for Sort by. Verify that Ascending is selected.Room: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine the rooms that meet the design requirements as they are green in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Check Supply Airflow for Name. Select Air Flow for Type. in the Fields list. Click OK twice. select Check Supply Airflow. select the field and click Remove. Select Between for Test. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 43 . Click OK. The Check Supply Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. Enter Room: Actual Supply Airflow . ■ ■ Click the Background Color and select Green in the Color dialog. Organize the data 13 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select HVAC for Discipline. These rooms have a difference between the actual airflow and the calculated airflow within the range of -35 L/s and 35 L/s. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use.■ Room: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field. Verify that Formula is selected. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. and click Conditional Format. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. 10 Click OK. Enter -35 L/s and 35 L/s for Value. and Itemize every instance is selected. Select Blank line. Select Footer.

A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. select the 150 L/s Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 4 air terminal. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. you are changing the air terminal connector size. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. NOTE If a different project is also open. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog.Mech floor plan view. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. 44 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. 19 Delete 150 L/s enter 165.A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. Next.Mech to make it the active view. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing. and press Tab. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and draw a zoom region around Office 4 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. The green values in the Check Supply Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room meets the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 L/s. The Check Supply Airflow value displays in green indicating that it now complies with the Office 4 airflow design requirements. and maximize the 1 . 17 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. the selected air terminal displays in red. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. double-click 1 . 15 In the Project Browser. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. After you modify the airflow parameters. all Check Supply Airflow parameters display in green. Use the schedule as a design tool 14 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. 18 In the schedule. 20 Modify the other Flow parameters for the supply air terminals so that the airflow design requirements are met. 21 Close the schedule view. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. 16 Enter ZR. All other Check Supply Airflow values that do not meet these requirements are not green and need modification. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project. This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule.

In this exercise. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. and then create the logical connection between the system components. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. click Edit for View Range. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This is the power of BIM. Explore the System Browser 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Under Primary Range. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. click the Training Files icon. If the System Browser does not respond. 5 Click OK twice. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. and click View Properties. 7 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter an Offset value of 3000. click System Browser. you create air systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Top parameter. 4 In the View Range dialog.22 If you want to save your work. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 45 . Open the m Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. under Extents. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1 . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. and click Save. A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating the logical connection. 23 In the Save As dialog. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. Unlike logical connections. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project.Mech to make it the active view. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems.Mech view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. However. click in the drawing area to make it active. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. then press F9. During this exercise. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building.

11 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 3 door.200mm Inlet. If desired. For now. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. if all system components are assigned. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. 46 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You will learn more about systems in this exercise. 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. So. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. click to place the VAV box. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems. and press Esc twice. after you placed the diffusers. As you assign diffusers to systems. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 8 With the view active. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. and sketch a zoom region around Office 3 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Thus. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. 10 In the Type Selector. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. enter ZR. select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. air terminals. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. click Mechanical Equipment.

Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 14 Select the Office 3 rectangular diffuser. and select the VAV box. you add the VAV to this system. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. enter 2900 for Offset. system specific tools display on the Options Bar. click (Create Supply Air System). This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. Next. You created a system that includes the air terminal.Modify VAV box parameters 12 Right-click the VAV box. enter 165 L/s for AirFlow. This VAV box services only Office 3 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. 16 On the Options Bar. Under Mechanical . Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. and click Element Properties. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 47 . select an air terminal that you added to the system.Airflow. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and cleared from the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Select Equipment for System).

the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. Create the ductwork 17 With the new system selected. The organization is from upstream. 20 On the Options Bar. This display indicates that the new system is selected. ■ Click (Next Solution). place the cursor over the Office 3 air terminal and press Tab. and select solution 2. and select the system. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. and click Select to select the system. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. do the following: 19 ■ Verify that Network is select for Solution Type. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. 48 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears.The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. Notice that Solutions is selected. 18 On the Options Bar. They remain assign to their respective default systems. The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. 21 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air. select Main. click Settings.

26 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. For example.Round for Flex Duct Type. Enter 2900 for Offset. click Finish Layout. For more information. select Medium for Detail Level. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. For example. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project.22 Under System Type: Supply Air. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 49 . as was the elbow itself. 24 Under System Type: Supply Air. refer to Help. Enter 2900mm for Offset. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . you can delete ductwork and the system remains. The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. Change the geometry display 27 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area. 25 Click OK. 23 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. thus it is not part of the system. Verify that 1800 is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Branch.

and equipment. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. If the entire network does not highlight. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal. fittings. and enter . 30 On the Options Bar. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. Click OK. The first time you press Tab. Verify that Only is selected. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 31 In the Duct Sizing dialog. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and press Tab twice. and click to select them. Under Constraints. select Coarse detail level for single line. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.65 Pa/m. ■ 50 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. under Sizing Method. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Check duct connectivity 28 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. On the View Control Bar. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. then you know that a disconnection exists. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. click Sizing.TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Rerouting usually correct this issue. Size the duct 29 Place the cursor over the duct. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction.

enter ZR. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees.The Office 3 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 32 Click in the drawing area. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 51 . select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . click Mechanical Equipment. 35 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 4 door.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 4 and 5 (the offices immediately below Office 3). 36 In the left column of the System Browser. and click Element Properties.200mm Inlet. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 33 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the VAV box. double-click the second VAV box listed. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed. 34 In the Type Selector.

and click Select from the context menu. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. right-click the component in the left column. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. 42 Place the cursor over the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. 40 Click (Edit System). 52 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 39 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. a new system is immediately created. and click OK.TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. right-click. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. under Constraints. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. This VAV airflow is the total airflow from the Office 4 and Office 5 air terminals. 41 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. and enter 350 L/s for AirFlow. enter 2900mm for Offset. system equipment. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. click Add To System. This system includes the selected system component(s). and number of elements in the active being edited. The component highlights in the drawing area. NOTE After you select a system component. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. If not. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. 38 Select the Office 4 rectangular diffuser. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

45 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 44 Select the Office 5 rectangular diffuser. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. 49 Place your cursor over the Office 4 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. 48 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. click Finish System. On the Options Bar. the number of elements has increased to 2. 46 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 4. 47 Select the VAV box.43 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. click Select Equipment. On the Options Bar. the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 53 .

and select solution 3. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.If you leave the mouse stationary. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 51 On the Options Bar. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2. 50 Click to select the system. click Layout Path. The system displays in red. 54 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 53 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. 52 On the Options Bar.

The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 54 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 55 . This was the reason for the warning message. click Finish Layout. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. You can click in the drawing area to close the warning.

or modify the duct manually. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. and click to select them. 57 In the Type Selector. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. 61 On the Options Bar. Size the duct 60 Place the cursor over the duct. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. You can either relocate the VAV box. 59 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Verify that Only is selected.IMPORTANT When creating layouts. and after the end point snap displays. you can review it and take action if necessary. Add an endcap 55 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 4. Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. click to place the endcap. 62 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. 58 Move the cursor over the end of the main. 56 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. under Sizing Method. click Duct Fitting. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. So. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals. Click OK. ■ 56 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. If a warning occurs. Under Constraints. click Sizing. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard.65 Pa/m. and enter .

you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. However. air terminals.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 4 and 5 is sized using the Friction method at . The VAV box. and press Tab twice. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Next. Check duct connectivity 63 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 57 .65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork.

select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . 66 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 65 In the 1 .Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 64 Right-click in the drawing area. 69 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. click Mechanical Equipment. 67 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.200mm Inlet. 68 In the Type Selector.Mech view. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space). 70 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the VAV box. 58 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .

and click OK. enter 2900 for Offset. 74 On the Options Bar. The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. click . click . 73 While pressing CTRL. You will add this later. This is the total amount of airflow for the 5 air terminals that will be connected. select the 5 air terminals to the right of the VAV. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 59 . Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. click to select the system. 75 On the Options Bar. and press TAB once to highlight the system. under Constraints. and the red system display cleared. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system.71 Select the VAV. The selected diffusers highlight in red. The new supply air system displays in red. Then. and on the Options Bar. You can refer to the Air Terminal Schedule or select each air terminal to verify this information. and enter 825 for AirFlow. click . 76 Select the VAV to add it to the system. 72 In the Element Properties dialog.

The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. select the left section of the main. 78 On the Options Bar. ■ Click . and select solution 3. You have logically connected the air system components. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Next. 79 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 80 In the drawing area. click Modify. 60 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 77 With the system selected. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path.

The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. 81 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the main down until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV.After you select the main. 82 Repeat this procedure and snap the right section of the main creating a straight main to the VAV. Next. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 61 . The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction. select each of the 2 branches and drag them to their new locations as shown. 83 With Modify selected on the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. notice that drag controls display. you need to modify the branch layout.

A change has occurred in the air system design. Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. mechanical equipment. click Add to System. The ductwork is created.84 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. and reuse the Layout Path to modify the branch layout. 86 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. Undo the layout. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. NOTE If flex duct is created instead of duct fittings. The system components are now physically connected. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 87 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. 62 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 85 Select the main duct. the branch path is too close to the diffuser.

The new system component is now part of the same system.Notice that on the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 63 . duct segment. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. Next. 89 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. select a system component that is already part of a system. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. 91 While pressing CTRL. 88 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. VAV. You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. This verifies the added diffuser. 90 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. click Finish System. and working from the end of the main. and click Delete on the context menu. elbow. Then. select the transition. 92 Right-click. and the other duct segment. the Number of Elements increased to 6. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal.

select the transition fitting. At this point. and click Draw Duct on the context menu to draw the duct. 93 Zoom the view. Undo and drag the top transition connector to relocate the fitting and flex duct. 97 On the Options Bar. You will draw duct in the next exercise. and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. You need to widen the distance between the 2 elements. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. NOTE If you are moving the transition fitting only. and locate the top connector.The rectangular to round duct transition fitting is too close to the main. 95 Zoom out the view. then you are dragging the lower connector. 94 Drag the connector (and flex duct) straight down toward the diffuser to shorten the flex duct length and provide sufficient space to create the duct. 64 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 96 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. However. you can right-click the connector. continue using the Layout Path tool. otherwise an error will occur when you attempt to size the duct.

The new ductwork is created. and after the end point snap displays. This caused the warning message to display. 102 Move the cursor over the end of the main. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. click Finish Layout.■ Click . 101 In the Type Selector. click Duct Fitting. Add an endcap 99 Zoom in on the open end of the main duct. Ignore the warning message. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. and select solution 1 98 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 65 . the main is open and it requires an endcap to close the duct. click to place the endcap. Due to the takeoff based duct type. 100 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

66 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Size the duct 105 Right-click the VAV box. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity. and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. 107 Place the cursor over the main duct. and press Tab twice. You need to change the airflow because you added an air terminal to the system. and click Element Properties from the context menu.Airflow. and click to select them. The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Check duct connectivity 104 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights.Notice that the centerline snap also displays to aid in fitting placement. 106 Under Mechanical . 103 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. change the airflow to 990 L/s. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout.

■ This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . and enter . Next. For VAV airflow. double-click 1 .65 Pa/m. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. specify the air terminal airflow. under Sizing Method.Mech floor plan to make it the active view.The selection displays in red. Reposition and rotate if necessary. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 67 . Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems 110 In the Project Browser. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. Verify that Only is selected. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Under Constraints. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . under Mechanical. 108 On the Options Bar. click Sizing. 109 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Click OK. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1.

Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. set the Primary Range Top Offset to 3000mm and the Detail Level to Medium. see the note below. modify the duct manually. 68 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . modify the layout. Next. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct.200mm Inlet with a 2900mm offset. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Reposition and rotate if necessary. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. see the note below. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at . Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 112 Use the 2 . you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV : M_Size 3 . select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. If you receive errors.Mech mechanical floor plan view.65 Pa/m and select Only. Do not change the duct conversion settings. You can either relocate the VAV box. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. 113 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. So. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement.■ Select and modify a Network layout path solution. If you receive errors. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. or reinsert duct fittings. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 69 . Size the duct using the Friction method at . In the next exercise. see the note above. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. Do not change the duct conversion settings. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. 114 If you want to save your work. Verify that all Other options are cleared. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. In this exercise. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. click File menu ➤ Save. You also specified VAV airflow. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. and click Save.65 Pa/m and select Only. Although you already checked duct connectivity. Add M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard fittings where needed. ■ ■ ■ ■ The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. 115 In the Save As dialog. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. see the note above. and validated the systems in the System Browser. After creating each system.■ For VAV airflow. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. sized the ductwork. If you receive errors. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. If you receive errors. checked duct connectivity. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. specify the air terminal airflow. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow.

you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. and click OK.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. click the Training Files icon. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 3. click Section. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and the second click specifies the section tail. 4. Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. under Graphics. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. right-click Section 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Zoom to Fit.Mech to make it the active view. 6 In the Project Browser. 70 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Properties. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the section head. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click 1 . Open the m Using Views for Duct Validation. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 5 air terminal to set the end point. and 5. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The section relocates under HVAC. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 3 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. enter ZR. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). After you add the section. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.

Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 71 . and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. select Medium for Detail Level. 10 On the Design Bar. The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles. click Modify. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. The section head displays in blue. similar to the level heads in the elevation view.8 In the drawing area. 12 On the View Control Bar. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 4 and 5. click the section. The selected section displays in red. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view.

and click OK. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. and click View Properties. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. 72 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. A section box displays around the building model. 18 On the View Control Bar. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar.14 Continue validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. 17 In the Project Browser. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. under Extents. NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. Notice that in the 3D Mech view. and double-click 3D Mech to make it the active view. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. select Section Box. click Modify. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 21 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. 26 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. and 5 duct geometry is as you expected. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. Scroll. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. In the next exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. and Spin buttons to verify that the Office 3. 27 If you want to save your work. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. use the Zoom. click (Dynamically Modify View). navigate to the folder of your choice. 24 On the View toolbar. You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 73 . 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls.22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. 4. 25 In the Dynamic View dialog.

2 Enter ZR.Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Open the m Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. click the Training Files icon. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duct. select Round Duct : Taps. and click to specify the start point. do the following. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. Verify that Angle is cleared. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech to make it the active view. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room until a snap displays aligning to the furthermost left partition of the Ladies’ Room above. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that 300 is selected for diameter (D:). 74 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. Enter 2900 for Offset. 4 In the Type Selector. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

9 Move the cursor straight down and draw the second duct segment 9800mm. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 75 .7 Move the cursor to the left and when the listening dimensions appear. 10 Now. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. and click to specify the end point. 8 Press Enter to specify the end point of the first duct segment. move the cursor down and 45 degrees to the right. and after the listening dimensions appear. enter 2750 to specify a 2750mm length for the first duct segment. enter 11000.

If the duct does not clear the wall. If you happened to press Esc twice and closed the Draw tool. Depending on the location of the first duct start point. 11 Finally. 12 Press Esc once to stop drawing the current duct. Next. press Tab. use the Move tool to move the horizontal duct segment (located over the Mechanical/Electrical) up until the duct clears the exterior wall. 76 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Duct on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar to open it again. after the connector snap displays. and press Enter to specify the third segment end point. click to specify the start point. and after the listening dimensions appear. Notice that the Draw tool remains active. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 13 Enter ZR. Then. move the cursor to the right.NOTE The primary duct needs to clear the exterior wall located on the left. 14 Place the cursor over the Office 3 VAV box supply air connection. enter 3000. and select the duct (duct displays in red). and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 3. place the cursor over the duct. you connect VAV boxes to the primary. it may not clear the wall.

TIP When drawing duct. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. and click to specify the end point. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 77 . 17 Move the cursor down and draw a 2450mm vertical second duct segment. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. 16 Draw the first duct segment 600mm to the right. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 200mm VAV primary connector diameter. use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. and press Enter to specify the end point. You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 15 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. If you pause briefly. When drawing duct. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height.

18 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. 19 With the Draw tool open. 78 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 4. the duct run connecting the Office 3 VAV to the primary is complete. After you click to specify the end point. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy.

TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. 21 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 20 Place the cursor over the Office 4 VAV box supply air connection. 24 Select the Office 18 VAV. 25 Right-click. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 79 . However. Because the duct is complete after you connected it to the primary. click to specify the start point. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. 26 In the Type Selector. 22 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. you only need to press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. and after the connector snap displays. TIP If you right-click a connector and click Draw Duct on the context menu. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. On the View Control Bar. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. or width and height. the duct diameter. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. 23 Zoom in on the Office 18 VAV box located in the lower-middle of the level 1 floor plan. Remember that you quickly locate a room by highlighting the room component and viewing the room tag information on a tooltip and on the Status Bar. you should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 27 Draw a duct segment that connects to the centerline of the primary.

Check connectivity 32 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. 80 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 30 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. 29 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. zoom the view to the right of the primary.28 Press Esc. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. 31 The 5 secondary supply air system duct runs are now physically connected to the primary.

NOTE Do not size the primary at this time.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 81 . You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. 33 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D Mech views. Do not connect the Office 11 VAV because a routing conflict exists. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. Finally. You will size the primary in a later exercise. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. you will do that in a later exercise. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Check connectivity. and Angle is cleared. This is because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. On the Options Bar. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. Do not size the primary. Complete the level 1 primary duct 34 In the Project Browser. 35 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. specify a 2900mm offset. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view.

and double-click 2 . specify a 2900mm offset.Mech to make it the active view. Draw the level 2 primary duct 36 In the Project Browser.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. Do not size the primary. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. Do not connect the Office 26 VAV because a routing conflict exists. and Angle is cleared. On the Options Bar. Check connectivity. You will size the primary in a later exercise. ■ ■ ■ 82 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and use the Section 1 and 3D Mech views for duct geometry validation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You will connect this VAV in a later exercise. The main has a 300mm diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 200mm. 37 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below.

you encounter routing conflicts such as the placement of fittings that prevents a duct connection. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 39 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 1. You can resolve these conflicts manually or automatically. In this exercise. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 38 If you want to save your work. Open the m Resolving Routing Conflicts. you use the Routing Solutions tool to automatically resolve duct routing conflicts with the high pressure supply air primary duct by selecting from a series of routing solutions. Finally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. and click Save. In this exercise. In the next exercise. you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views. Resolving Routing Conflicts Often as you create ductwork.Mech to make it the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. While drawing duct. and notice that the duct run has an elbow that does not allow a connection from the VAV box to the primary. 2 Zoom in on the VAV box outside Office 11 located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. Resolve a routing conflict on level 1 1 In the Project Browser. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 83 . click File menu ➤ Save.

4 On the Options Bar.3 Place the cursor over the primary duct run. and click Finish. However. 84 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 6 Select Solution 1. The selected primary duct run displays in red. 5 Use the left and right arrow buttons on the Options Bar or to view the different routing solutions. press Tab once. click Routing Solutions. and click to select the primary and its fittings. Notice that 2 end control points display enabling you to modify the duct ends in any direction. you will use the solutions to resolve the routing conflict.

The 45 degree elbows are replaced by a 90 degree elbow. 8 Right-click. Next. and click Draw Duct from the context menu. and place the cursor over the primary supply air connector. 10 Draw the duct from the primary air connector to the centerline of the primary below. you check connectivity. verify that Round Duct : Taps is selected. and press TAB twice. 7 Select the VAV box. 9 In the Type Selector. Resolving Routing Conflicts | 85 . 11 Place the cursor over the primary. and click to specify the end point.

In this exercise. Resolve a routing conflict on level 2 13 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 17 In the Save As dialog. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 16 If you want to save your work. 14 Zoom in on the Office 26 VAV box located in the upper-right corner of the floor plan. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes but you have yet to sized the primary. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. This determines the airflow direction.Mech to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. However. and double-click 2 . 86 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . enter Resolving Routing Conflicts Training for File name.Velocity. select a routing solution to resolve the routing conflict that prevents the Office 26 VAV box from connecting to the primary. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork. Both tools provide a series of solutions and the ability to modify those solutions. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run. then connect the VAV to the primary. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. You viewed various routing solutions and selected the best solution to resolve 2 routing conflicts.All connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you manually drew duct to connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. The routing solution and connection are shown below. 15 Using the process that you just learned. click File menu ➤ Save. you size the high pressure supply air primary duct. Before sizing the primary.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. click the Training Files icon. the Routing Solutions tool allows you to modify a specific segment of duct. navigate to the folder of your choice. IMPORTANT Unlike the Layout Path tool which allows you to create entire duct layouts. and click Save. After resolving the conflicts. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the m Duct Sizing . you used the Routing Solutions tool to resolve routing conflicts. In the next exercise.

and click to select it. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. click Duct Fitting. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. and double-click 1 . 2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located outside Office 18. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 87 . click to place the endcap. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Mech to make it the active view. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. and click Mechanical. and after the end point snap displays. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.

10 In the Duct Sizing dialog. ■ 88 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The selected primary displays in red. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and enter 12. click Sizing. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing.5 m/s. Verify that Only is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. Under Constraints. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. under Sizing Method. Click OK.

or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. So.The sized left primary is shown below. and press TAB twice. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. or reinsert duct fittings. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 89 . You can either relocate the VAV box. Next. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. modify the layout. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 13 Using the process that you just learned. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. modify the duct manually. and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 17.

place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction. and double-click 2 . The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. As in level 1. 14 Using the method you have learned. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 90 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Size the level 2 primary duct run 15 In the Project Browser.The sized right primary is shown below.Mech to make it the active view. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run.

you sized the primary duct for the building. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Velocity Training for File name.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.Mech Duct Classes for Name. Open the m Duct Color Scheme. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 91 . This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements.19 If you want to save your work. Then. 2 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. enter 1 . Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Mechanical. A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . right-click 1 Mech. 3 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. First. Notice that you use the same duct color scheme legend type that you created in a previous exercise called HVAC. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. Like room color scheme. click the Training Files icon. and click OK.Mech. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. enter Duct Sizing . 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. click File menu ➤ Save. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. and click to place the legend. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. and click Save. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. right-click Copy of 1 . In this exercise. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.Mech is created and becomes the active view. navigate to the folder of your choice. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. In the next exercise. Using the same color scheme legend type allows you to quickly assign consistent color scheme legends throughout your design. 20 In the Save As dialog. right-click the Design Bar.

Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area. delete the existing text. and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. In the Color column. and enter high velocity for the second row. Select By range. you change the color scheme. ■ ■ ■ Click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity for Color. and click OK. In the Color column. click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box. and on the Options Bar. In the At Least column. Next. 92 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. In the Caption column. click in the second row. and enter 7. select the duct color scheme legend that you placed.8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and enter low velocity for the first row.5 m/s. TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. and click to place the legend. enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 In the Type Selector.Mech. click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Rename. right-click 2 Mech. Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Save. Using the same color scheme allow you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 93 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan.Mech is created and becomes the active view. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them. 18 If you want to save your work. and click OK. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. verify that Color Scheme Legend : HVAC is selected for color scheme legend type. enter 2 .Mech Duct Classes for Name. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 . verify that Duct Color Fill is selected for Color Scheme. right-click Copy of 2 . 19 In the Save As dialog. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Open the m Duct Sizing . Every supply air system that you created is listed. such as Mechanical Supply Air 6.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. such as a VAV box and diffusers. and click Show. and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. expand the Mechanical systems folder. 5 In the Element(s) In View dialog. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method In 2 previous exercises.Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3. then press F9. and double-click 1 . you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. 3 Right-click Supply Air. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size. you split the duct main into multiple pieces. First. 2 In the System Browser. not ductwork (physical connections). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser. and click Expand All.Mech to make it the active view. If the System Browser does not respond. you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. 94 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it.In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the System Browser is closed. To accomplish this. you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method. you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. In the next exercise. click Close to deactivate the Show tool. and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally. click the Training Files icon.Equal Friction. Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. click in the drawing area to make it active. and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. The 1 .

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display. 9 With the Split tool open. and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box. split the main to the left of the middle branch at 4300mm from the beginning of the main. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 95 . Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main. 7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions.Split the main 6 On the Tools toolbar. click (Split). 10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Note that the VAV box is not selected. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. and split the main 2400mm from the end of the main. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. and click to select them.

under Category. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. and enter . Clear Leader.12 On the Options Bar. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it. do the following: ■ ■ Select Equal Friction. 16 In the Tags dialog. Next. transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Click OK. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. ■ IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. 96 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. verify that M_Duct Size Tag is loaded. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main. The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at . Notice that as the airflow decreases. click Tag ➤ By Category. Click Tags. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Under Constraints. and click to place each tag. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined. click Sizing. and click Cancel.65 Pascals per one meter of ductwork. ignore this warning. under Sizing Method.65 Pa/m. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. for Ducts. 15 On the Options Bar.

1 In the Project Browser.Mech to make it the active view. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 21 In the Save As dialog.TIP To reposition a tag. you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. In the next exercise. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. select the tag and drag it to a new location. 20 If you want to save your work. you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. 2 Right-click in the view. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. click the Training Files icon.Equal Friction Training for File name. 19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Duct Sizing . You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Inspecting Air Systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. Inspecting Air Systems In this exercise. and click Save. First. pressure. you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. and double-click 2 . you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized. and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Inspecting Air Systems | 97 . The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Using this tool. you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments. In this exercise.

IMPORTANT To select a system. diffuser. 98 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. Right-click a system from the System Browser. The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. duct fitting. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. pressure. A tooltip also displays the system information. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow. and click Inspect from the context menu. select (Inspect). 5 On the Options Bar. After the System Inspector opens. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. click Inspect. select any duct segment. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. System tools display on the Options Bar.You will inspect this system. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click . or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. 6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

click to temporarily place the inspection flag on segment. Next. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. Inspecting Air Systems | 99 . also known as the critical path. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment. These are not logically connected to this system. you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system.

17 In the Save As dialog. under Graphics. enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click View Properties. 100 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . airflow. 4 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view. A new view called Copy of Roof is created and becomes the active view. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Create a new roof plan view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof. right-click Copy of Roof. 2 In the Project Browser. and pressure information for various systems in the project. you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. and click Rename. In this exercise. 3 Enter Roof Mech for Name. and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. navigate to the folder of your choice. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. and click OK. Placing Air Conditioning Units In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. Open the m Placing AC Units. In a later exercise. you place 2 AC units. you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. select Mechanical for Discipline. For example.13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 6 Click OK. You also compared system information across a system. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction. 16 If you want to save your work. you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 7 In the Roof Mechanical view. and then click Modify on the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room).This specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. enter ZR. Zoom in if necessary to locate the lower end point snap. 10 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room. 11 Snap to the lower end point of the horizontal partition wall in the Men’s Room as shown.25 Ton . and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. 9 In the Type Selector. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. click Mechanical Equipment.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 101 . 12 Click to place the AC unit.

click Section. 102 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Move the cursor to the right. 19 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the section end point. A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 15 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 8 VAV box. you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Section 2.Next. and click Properties. and after the cursor is past the AC unit. under Graphics. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). select HVAC for Sub Discipline. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click OK. and click to specify the section start point. Create a new section view 13 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. you must relocate it. 25 Select the AC unit. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. 23 On the View Control Bar. The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle. click Modify. 24 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 22 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. click Medium for Detail Level. NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes. 21 On the Design Bar. AC units are level-based components. To place the AC unit on the roof surface. and click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. Placing Air Conditioning Units | 103 . notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.20 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit.

27 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit. (Remember to select the reference edge first). ■ Create a new section view above the AC unit as shown below. (300mm directly above the start point). use the Align tool (on the Tools toolbar) to align the left edge of the level 1 AC unit to the left edge of the level 2 AC unit. click to specify the move end point. Next. This specifies the AC unit offset level of 300mm which moves the AC unit to the roof surface. and place a M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 . and after the end point snap displays. Then snap the top edge of the AC unit to the upper mechanical room wall and click to place it. place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures: ■ Work in the Roof Mech view. The AC unit placement is shown below. TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. click to specify the move start point. and move the top edge of the AC unit 500mm down. Place the level 1 AC unit 28 Using the methods that you learned. Use the Move tool. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. Remember to relocate the view in the Project Browser as you did with the Section 2 view. and adjust the depth view clip plane to capture the level 1 AC unit only.25 Ton . First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. 104 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .26 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

relocate the AC unit 300mm above the roof level to place the AC unit on the roof surface. and click Save. 2 Select the section box. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 105 . click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. Completing the Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views.■ Using the new Section 3 view with Medium detail level. you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Placing AC Units Training for File name. ■ 29 If you want to save your work. and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof. In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Modify the 3D Mech view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Mech to make the view active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the m Completing Supply Air Systems. The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. First. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 30 In the Save As dialog. Then.

you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. Note that if this option is unavailable. Next. you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.The entire building including the AC units display. drag the mouse to spin the model as shown. click (Dynamically Modify View). 4 Use the Spin button on the Dynamic View dialog. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. TIP You can also press Shift-middle mouse button. and drag the mouse to spin the model. If you like. you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D Mech views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. and while pressing the middle mouse button. if you do this. 3 On the View toolbar. Tile the views 5 With the 3D Mech view active. 106 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . the active view is the only open window.

select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 9 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. 8 Zoom the view in both windows as shown. 13 Move the cursor up to begin drawing duct and press Spacebar to match the duct size and offset to the AC supply connection size and offset. do the following: ■ Enter 1700 for W: (width). double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 10 In the Type Selector. under Mechanical. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. TIP When tiling 2 views. 7 Enter WT to tile both windows. ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. and 500 for H: (height). 14 On the Options Bar. and press Tab. click Duct. You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. the connector snap displays. 12 Click to specify the duct riser start point. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 107 . This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. TIP When drawing duct.6 In the Project Browser. the active view is tiled to the left. place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection. you did not begin drawing duct before pressing Spacebar You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector. 11 In the Roof Mech view. Enter -750 for Offset.

IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components. 2900mm. connections are automatically created. and after listing dimensions display. enter 1050 and press Enter to specify the end point. The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 2900mm from level 2. 15 Move the cursor up.The -750mm offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. and then the duct continues horizontally for 1050mm. 16 Click Modify on the Design Bar. If the 2 are different. Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 108 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 17 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view.

You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted. you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. On the View Control Bar. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You now switch to the 2 . TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 . and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 . double-click 2 . change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit.Mech to make it the active view. Notice that only the duct riser displays.Mech view. 18 Close the Roof Mech view. 20 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 19 In the Project Browser.Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser.Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 109 .

25 In the Type Selector. select the adjoining elbow. select Round Duct : Taps. click Duct. The selected items display in red. click to specify the start point. 110 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .21 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment. 22 In the 2 Mech view. 26 On the Options Bar. The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. For Offset. and while pressing CTRL. 27 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser. select 450. verify that 2900 is specified. select the horizontal primary segment. and after the mid point snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 23 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow. Verify that Auto connect is selected.

The left primary is connected to the AC unit.28 Move the cursor over the primary. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 111 . and after the centerline snap displays. 30 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. 29 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. click to specify the end point.

and place the cursor over the end connector. pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment. 33 Select the right primary duct. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. 112 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Mech view.Next. you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. 31 Spin the 3D Mech view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. 32 In the 2 .

then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. 35 Select the primary duct. click (Create Similar). 36 On the Edit toolbar. 37 Place the cursor over the end of the primary. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 113 . or by right-clicking a connector. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create duct. you should always verify that the duct type is correct in the Type Selector. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point.34 Drag the connector to right. click to specify the duct segment end point. if you use the Create Similar tool. However. NOTE When drawing duct either by using Duct draw tool on the Design Bar. . and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall. and after the connector snap displays. click and draw the primary to the left over the wall. and after the centerline snap displays.

40 The primary duct is created and connected to the riser. 114 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click to specify the segment end point.38 Draw the primary down 1000mm. and click to specify the end point. 39 Draw the primary to the edge of the AC duct riser.

However. 42 Validate the geometry in the 3D Mech view. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected.41 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Create Similar tool. place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice.Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 115 . Check connectivity 43 In the 2 . You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit.

The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. click Duct Fitting. select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. 116 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . zoom in on the duct riser. 45 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar. 47 Place your cursor over the top edge. click to add the endcap. Add endcaps 44 In the 2 . Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 46 In the Type Selector. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork.Mech view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 117 . click to add the endcap. 49 In the Type Selector. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow.. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement. 51 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. 50 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. select M_Round Duct Endcap : M_Standard.48 With the Duct Fitting tool open. Verify endcap placement 52 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement.

A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. 54 Using the 2 views. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. verify the duct riser endcap. 118 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Create the high pressure supply air system. 53 In the 3D Mech view. 55 Press Tab to check connectivity. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. 57 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. use the same method to validate the endcap geometry. click in the 2 . 56 With the 2 views tiled. and then validate its geometry. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.Mech view to make it active. Next.

Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of the current view are selected. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D Mech view.Mech view range. and then select Mechanical Equipment. (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the 61 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system.Notice that all of the selected elements highlight. and select the level 2 AC unit. and click OK. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 119 . only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . click Check None. In this case. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. 62 Click the 3D Mech view title bar to make the window active. 59 In the Filter dialog. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. 60 On the Options Bar. click selected VAV boxes to it. 58 On the Options Bar.

Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed 66 Expand M_Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton . 120 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. 63 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. 67 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 24 to view the VAV boxes. Supply Air. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). expand Mechanical. ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. In the Unassigned folder. 68 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. all system components must be logically connected by a system. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. This is the system that you just created.Bottom Return Connection : M_15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 24 system listing. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. or even without ductwork. However. 65 In the System Browser. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems. Validate the primary supply air system 64 Press F9 to open the System Browser. and click Select.You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category.

move the cursor down. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. Inspect the primary supply air system 69 In the System Browser. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. Next. Complete the level 1 supply air system 77 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. 75 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. diffuser. 72 Click a blank space in the 2 . and enter 1050mm. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 24. and press Enter to specify the duct end point. duct fitting. 2900mm. ■ ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 121 . Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector.Mech drawing area to make the view active. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. 71 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system. and a 500mm height.The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. The System Inspector tool opens. Next. Specify the offset to -4400mm. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. click Inspect. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D Mech view. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. Click the supply connector. 76 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. click Inspect. and click Inspect. 74 Make the 3D Mech view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system. 73 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system. you inspect the system. 70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 1700mm width.

This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 .Mech view (if open). ■ 122 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.Mech view.This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit.Mech view. open the 1 . and tile it to the left of the 3D Mech view. Watch for the centerline snap as shown. In the 1 .

and validate the duct geometry in the 3D Mech view. Instead of drawing duct. The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit. ■ Completing the Supply Air Systems | 123 .Mech view. and remember to zoom the view. release the mouse button.■ Connect the primary to the AC. and after the edge highlights. Use M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : M_Standard. ■ In the 1 . The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. select the left primary duct segment. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool.

In this exercise. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 124 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and validated these logical connections. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. ■ 78 If you want to save your work. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. 79 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save. you check the systems in your project. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. and quickly target those systems that need attention. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown.■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. Using tiled windows. Validate the system using the System Browser. you need to validate them. and for duct sizing. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. and inspect the system with the System Inspector.

3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. and for duct sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. In the System Browser. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. as a tutorial exercise. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). After you assign the system components to a system. click Check Duct Systems. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. the duct is now associated with that system.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. thus assigning the components to a system. However. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. Open the m Checking Air Systems. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. click the Training Files icon. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. For example. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. So. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. Checking Air Systems | 125 . you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. Then. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. Revit MEP lists the system components that are associated with each warning. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you view the warnings.

To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. 8 Right-click Supply Air. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. placing a circulator pump. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. In this exercise. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In the next lesson. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. You now confirm the systems that you created. 6 Using the same methods. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. you create hydronic piping systems. 11 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. and click Select Press to view it and its assigned system components. and inspecting the piping system.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. 126 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler.The red lines represent the default logical connection. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. otherwise click Close. Then. Depending on your air systems design. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Save. In this lesson. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. 9 Right-click a system. TIP If you have multiple views open. 10 If you want to save your work. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder.

For Bottom. scroll down to the Extents category. and the systems to logically connect the system components. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected.Piping for Name. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. pipes.Mech. and click Rename. 6 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click OK. 9 In the View Range dialog. Under View Depth. right-click 2 Mech. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Next. Creating Piping Views | 127 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the view Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. Open the m Creating Piping Views.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. First.IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. enter 2 . Creating Piping Views In this exercise. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. circulator pump. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Level. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. Enter 950 for Cut plane Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. and enter -3500mm for Offset. and under Visibility. right-click Copy of 2 . 7 Click OK. a boiler. After completing the air systems lesson.Mech is created and becomes the active view. clear Grids. This hides the grid lines to make it easier to place the fin-tube radiators. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. and enter -3500 for Offset. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. A new view called Copy of 2 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Edit for View Range. and enter 950mm for Offset. click properties. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. under Graphics. you change the view range. you create new views in which to design the piping system.

the system filters are not used. On the Filters tab. 11 You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. In this lesson. click the Filters tab. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. and press Tab. Create and define filters 12 In the 2 . do the following: ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. (New). 14 Click Edit/New. and click OK. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600mm. you do not need to type measurement symbols. 15 In the Filters dialog. Considering this. however. 13 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. just enter the value. For example. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. click 16 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type.Piping view. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls. they will not filter all system elements needed. 17 Under Categories. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. it will be best to create filters. and verify that equals is selected. select Mechanical Equipment. 128 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . However. under Filters. 10 Click OK twice. click in the drawing area to make the view active. Also notice that 2 . So. 18 Under Filter Rules.NOTE When entering a value. you can add and activate filters.Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. The 2 . and enter VG.

Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. 21 Under Categories. you need a define common filter criteria. 25 In the Type Selector. So. This adds a description for all Exhaust Air Grill air terminals of the type M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. enter Air Terminal for Description. Next. Creating Piping Views | 129 . then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. and click on the Options Bar to view certain components. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 Under Filter Rules. To do this. Click Apply. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. such as family name. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Depending on the filter criteria. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. select Description for Filter by. and verify that equals is selected. click Air Terminals. you must spell both verbatim. or even a description that you define. 19 In the Filters dialog. you may want to select each component type separately. 29 Click Apply. . However. click Edit / New. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. under Filters. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. otherwise the filter will not work. Next. 24 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Air Terminal. type name.■ ■ ■ Select M_Parallel Fan Powered VAV for the family name. select M_Exhaust Air Grill : M_600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. you create a description as the common filter criteria. system type. This is the same rule for using formulae. click 20 Enter Air Terminals for Name. 23 Enter Air Terminal for the description. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. Verify that none is selected for And. click (Properties). return. and click OK twice.

you add a description for the supply air diffusers. you can select it. So. Remember to click Apply. and enter Supply Air for system type name. then the type parameters will not display. 39 Click OK. So. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name. verify that equals is selected. you need a common filter criteria. verify that equals is selected. This is because the selected supply. Category: Ducts. 33 Click OK twice. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. and select Round Duct for the family name. ■ ■ Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. you continue to create and define the filters. verify that equals is selected. 36 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. For Type. and click Apply. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . 30 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that equals is selected. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. And: Type Name. If you did not click Apply. 38 Using the methods that you just learned. select M_600x600 . And: Type Name. Category: Flex Ducts. verify that equals is selected. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. click the Filters tab. you need to define the filter again.200 Neck.Round. Next. Round Ducts. and select Air Terminal. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler.Round Connection. Category: Ducts.Next. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. click Edit/New. click in the Value column for Description. 130 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 32 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the return air diffusers. Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Filter by: Family Name. To filter multiple duct fitting types. Filter by: Family Name. 31 Under Identity Data. ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter. if differences exist in the selected elements. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. you filter duct fittings by system type. Remember. Category: Ducts. Filter by: System Type. return. you will not see the Description type parameter. verify that equals is selected.Piping view to make it active. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. 37 On the Filters tab. Filter by: Family Name. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. verify that equals is selected. you specify a family and a type name. Filter by: Family Name. ■ Flex Ducts . 35 Click in the 2 . By selecting each air terminal type separately. 34 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. and enter VG. select M_Rectangular Diffuser . Category: Duct Fittings. create the following new filters according to the specifications. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. Because you already entered the description.Duct Fittings. Next.

A new view called Copy of 1 . You now define the view properties. Next. and click View Properties. 46 Enter 1 . It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden.Mech is created and becomes the active view. Creating Piping Views | 131 . You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. 48 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. This is because you have not added them. Next.Piping for Name. and click OK. do the following: ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. select all of the filters that you created. under Graphics. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Next. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer. You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. right-click 1 Mech. 47 Right-click in the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. Create the level 1 piping view 44 In the Project Browser. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. you activate the filters. All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You used this duct to create the duct riser.Mech. Add and activate filters 40 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. 41 In the Add Filters dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. 42 Under Visibility. click Add. right-click Copy of 1 . you add and activate the filters. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. 43 Click OK. Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them.

Unlike the 2 . under Graphics. ducts. clear Grids. The 3000mm top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except for the boiler pipe connection). Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. right-click 3D Mech. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Create the 3D Piping view 54 In the Project Browser. If you turn off ducts visibility. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. under Primary Range. 55 In the Project Browser. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. 59 In the Visibility Graphics dialog.■ ■ Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. You do not need to use filters to place the boiler. and under Visibility. click the Annotation Categories tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. 49 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click Edit for View Range. you change the view range. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 3000 is specified for Top Offset. click the Filters tab. and click View Properties. you will be unable to view the duct riser. such as halftone architecture. right-click Copy of 3D Mech.Piping view. 132 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . As you create the pipe runs. The 1 . 56 Enter 3D Piping for Name. Next.Piping view displays the new view settings. and click OK. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 50 Click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 57 Right-click in the drawing area. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. 53 Click OK twice. You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. and to create the level 1 piping system. you will want to validate the geometry. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. Next. 52 In the View Range dialog. scroll down to the Extents category.

In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder.60 On the Filters tab. you place the radiators and a boiler. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. 67 In the Save As dialog. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. navigate to the folder of your choice. You used this duct to create the duct riser. and double-click 2 . The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. select all of the filters that you created. 61 In the Add Filters dialog.Piping to make it the active view. and click OK. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 66 If you want to save your work. and click Piping. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. 63 Click OK. right-click the Design Bar. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click Mechanical Equipment. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. 4 In the Type Selector. You also created filters to display certain system components. click Add. 62 Under Visibility. under Extents. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 133 . 65 Click OK. clear Section Box to turn it off. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. click File menu ➤ Save. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. select M_Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : M_25 NPT. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. and click Save. Open the m Placing Radiators and Boiler.

9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. except for the windows on the radius wall. and notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 8 Click to place the radiator.5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. 7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall. 134 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 6 Zoom in on Office 6 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown.

If so. If the same type of component exists on another level. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. and click Select All Instances. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify.25 L/s is specified for all of the selected radiators. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1.25 L/s for all fin-tube radiators in the building. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 0. double-click 1 . verify that 1. under Mechanical Loads. Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. you place the boiler. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. All level 2 radiators display in red. click . Next. you modify the radiator flow rate. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 135 . the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. and click OK. drag the section tail. right-click a radiator. and you do not want to include it. Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. then these are different across the selected objects. 12 On the Options Bar.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. Next. If parameters are blank.Piping to make this the active view. 14 Enter .25 for Flow. for Flow.

18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser. and select M_Boiler : M_Standard from the Type Selector. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room. under Type Parameters. Next. 136 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Notice that the connectors and temporary dimensions display after you place the boiler. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. and click Element Properties. watch the listening dimensions. right-click the boiler. 20 In the drawing area. you verify the boiler flow rate. You can filter the air terminals to make it easier to see the dimensions. and click to place the boiler 1200mm from the right vertical wall and 400mm from the horizontal wall in Open 1 as shown.50 L/s is set for Max Flow. verify that 14.16 Enter ZR.

you create the supply and return piping systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. and then create the logical connection between these system components.Piping to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. click in the drawing area to make it active. After creating the logical connection. 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. So. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. Open the m Creating Piping Systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system.22 Click OK. navigate to the folder of your choice. then press F9. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. In this exercise. If the System Browser does not respond. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. As you assign radiators to systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. click System Browser. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. and click Save. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. after you placed the radiators and boiler. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. and double-click 2 . You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. In the next exercise. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. Creating the Piping Systems | 137 . analyses cannot be performed. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. click the Training Files icon. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Unlike logical connections (systems). 23 If you want to save your work. 24 In the Save As dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. if all system components are assigned. Thus. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. During this exercise. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.

the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. click supply system. (Select Equipment for System). and click Select All Instances. 7 On the Options Bar. all other components are unavailable. 6 On the Options Bar. Notice that after you click . right-click. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). 138 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . All level 2 radiators display in red.Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. and select the boiler to assign it to the Notice that you can select only valid system components.

Notice that is does not display. click . Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. Next. you create the return piping system. 10 On the Options Bar. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. right-click. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. Creating the Piping Systems | 139 . and select the system. 9 On the Options Bar. This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. press Tab. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears.The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. So. The organization is from upstream. and select the boiler to assign it to the return system. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. This display indicates that the new system is selected. This is because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. Thus. and click Select to select the system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2.

13 Right-click each category. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. or even without pipe being drawn. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. navigate to the folder of your choice. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. 140 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. 18 In the Save As dialog. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. and click Save. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. 17 If you want to save your work. click File menu ➤ Save.11 The return system displays in red TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. These listings represent the systems that you just created. in the next exercise. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. expand Piping. Now that you logically connected the piping system components. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. and click Select. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. and cleared from the Options Bar. and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. In this exercise.

you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. and double-click 2 .Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise.Piping to make it the active view. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Pipe Runs | 141 . 4 In the Filter box. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. Notice that all components that are in the 2 . 3 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. In a later exercise. Open the m Creating Pipe Runs. and then select Mechanical Equipment. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click Check None.Piping view range highlight.

You can select each system in the dialog to view it. 5 On the Options Bar. the boiler. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 .The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red).Piping view) TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. click Layout Path. 142 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. 6 In the Select a System dialog. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. You will need to select a system to create the layout. you can place the cursor over a radiator. select Hydronic Supply 1. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar. Then. then the Select a System dialog will open. You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. Notice that the radiators. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. press Tab to highlight the system and select it. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. 7 Click OK. The system displays in red.

9 On the Options Bar. ■ Click (Next Solution). The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Enter -375mm for Offset. click Settings. verify that Solutions is selected. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. It does not reference the architecture. ■ Verify that 0. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. 11 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type.00° is specified for Slope. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. Using this inset. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. ■ Enter 300 for Inset. 12 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. and select solution 5. Later in this exercise. Next. Creating Pipe Runs | 143 . verify that Main is selected. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run.The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. 8 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. you create the supply pipe run 300mm from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall).

This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 14 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall. 13 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. structural beams. 144 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. refer to Help. Enter -375 for Offset. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. duct. you now modify the layout path. 17 In the drawing area. or architecture.This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 3275mm in the level 1 plenum space. zoom the view. and other obstacles. 15 Click OK. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. For more information. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). The layout path is located under the radiators. Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 16 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select Branch.

18 Using the drag control. Creating Pipe Runs | 145 .A drag control displays. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as layout path.

Ignore the no auto-route solution warning.19 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. 20 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. For example. select a different layout solution. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings are automatically inserted. 146 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. and is not part of the system. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. or offset elevations are incorrect.

IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). To turn off hidden lines. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. This is caused by the hidden line setting. select Fine for Detail Level. Creating Pipe Runs | 147 . The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap. 22 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area). If a pipe is hidden by an object.Change the geometry display 21 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 6. The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0.

TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. Next. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. Modify the pipe run 24 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. select Coarse for single line display. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. On the View Control Bar. Medium for 2-line duct display. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. 148 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Additionally. and click to select them. If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. So. 25 Place the cursor over the pipe. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 25mm diameter. Instead of moving the pipe. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red.23 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. The design requires 2 zones. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later.

and click to select it. you modify the supply pipe run diameter.26 Press Delete to delete the selection. Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. 27 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select 25mm for D: (diameter). 28 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). the logical connection (or system) is still intact. Creating Pipe Runs | 149 . and click Modify on the Design Bar. Next. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). 29 On the Options Bar.

you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. 31 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. Check connectivity 32 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations.The diameter of the main and branches change to 25mm. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the pipes had different diameters. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. Next. and equipment. width. If the entire network does not highlight. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. 33 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. then you know that a disconnect exists. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. press Tab 3 times. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 25mm indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. the diameter would not display. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. fittings. The first time you press Tab. 150 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 30 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter.

Correct a piping disconnect 35 Zoom in on the radiator in Office 8 located in the lower-left corner. You need to correct the disconnect. This allows you to better see disconnects. This disconnect caused the no auto-route solution warning message to display after creating the piping layout. you can click to select them.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. 34 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. Notice that the lower-left radiator did not highlight or display in red indicating that it is disconnected. Creating Pipe Runs | 151 .

Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. These plus signs are fitting conversion controls. 36 Zoom in on the upper-right elbow. You need to correct this disconnect by converting an elbow fitting to a tee and then drawing pipe to connect to the tee fitting. 37 Click the plus sign located to the left. These controls convert the selected fitting to the next possible fitting for the piping context. and select it.Notice that the branch did not connect to the main when the pipe run was created. 152 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . You may need to zoom the view closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting. Each control converts the elbow fitting into a tee fittings but with either a vertical or horizontal orientation. Notice that 2 plus signs and 2 connectors display.

TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. Creating Pipe Runs | 153 . 40 Click the elbow fitting. and click the right plus sign.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 39 Click the minus sign to convert back to the elbow fitting. A minus sign displays. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting. 38 Click the tee fitting. This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.

The Draw tool activates enabling you to create pipe. 154 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 44 Place the cursor over the end of the tee fitting. 43 In the Type Selector. Draw pipe to correct disconnects 41 Zoom out the view to display the disconnected pipe segment and the tee fitting. select Pipe Types : Standard. and after the fitting end point snap displays. click Pipe. click to specify the pipe segment start point. 42 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. You can now draw the pipe to connect the radiator to the supply pipe run. Notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active.

use the connector snap. If you do not use the connector snap. . you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector.TIP When using the Draw tool to create pipe. and press Spacebar to match the offset (-375) and diameter (25mm) to that of the selected tee connector. Remember to always check connectivity after drawing the pipe segment. click to specify the segment end point. a connection may not occur. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. 45 Move the cursor down toward the tee to begin drawing the pipe. If drawing contiguous segments. 46 Continue drawing the pipe segment down toward the tee fitting. NOTE When drawing pipe. you did not begin drawing before pressing Spacebar Note that although the diameter and offset are specified automatically. If you pause briefly. and after the connector snap displays. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. to locate a connector and create the connection. TIP When drawing pipe. the end point of current segment will be the start point of the next segment. and then specify an end point. Creating Pipe Runs | 155 . This automatically specifies the pipe diameter and offset (elevation) to match that of the selected start point object. you specify a start point then move the cursor to create the pipe segment. you can press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and begin drawing.

Scroll. and press TAB twice to check connectivity. 156 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . The pipe branch including the tee fitting highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 51 On the View toolbar. 48 Place the cursor over the pipe segment. Validate the pipe geometry 49 In the Project Browser. Next.The pipe segment is created connecting the radiator to the supply pipe run. 50 On the View Options Bar. specify the Detail Level to Fine to display the pipes in 2-line. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. click (Dynamically Modify View). use the Zoom. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and Spin buttons to verify that the level 2 supply pipe run geometry is as you expected. 52 In the Dynamic View dialog. you validate the pipe geometry. 47 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool.

Remember. Verify that 0. For pipe conversion settings.00° is specified for Slope. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 25mm. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Pipe Runs | 157 . you create the return pipe run. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 . Enter 600 for Inset. This places the pipes at a 3125mm elevation in the level 1 plenum space. modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. ■ In the Layout Path tool. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects.Next. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. Select Perimeter solution 3.Piping view. Create the level 2 return pipe run 53 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. and enter -525mm for both the main and branch offsets.

and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and click Save. converted fittings.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. You checked connectivity. 158 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . In this exercise. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. Open the m Resolving Pipe Interference. you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. navigate to the folder of your choice. In the next exercise. 54 If you want to save your work. 55 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name.The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. In this exercise. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. click the Training Files icon. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. corrected disconnects. You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell (Conference Room 31). Resolving Pipe Interference | 159 . and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. and double-click 2 . and the second click specifies the section tail. After you add the section. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. click Section. and click to specify the section head location. The first click specifies the section head.1 In the Project Browser. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. click Zoom in Region. Adding a section view is a 2-click process.Piping to make it the active view. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans.

160 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. A new section view named Section 4 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. The section head and tail display. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 4 view. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. 11 On the View Control Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. and click Properties. select Fine for Detail Level. The section relocates under Piping.NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 4. select Piping for Sub Discipline. click Modify. under Graphics. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. Resolving Pipe Interference | 161 . and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style.

14 Zoom in on the stairwell. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs.Piping to make it the active view. place the cursor over the top connector. and after the connectors display. 162 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and other aspects of your systems design. mechanical equipment placement. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas. Next. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs.

This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. Resolving Pipe Interference | 163 . 18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting.These connectors connect to the tee fittings. and after the fitting end point snap displays. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. release the mouse button to reconnect it. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run.

164 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. fittings. click (Split).NOTE When modifying pipe. you split the supply pipe segment. If you split the pipe. 21 On the Edit toolbar. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to 3000mm above the bottom pipe segment connector as shown. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. and click to split the pipe at 2160mm from the supply pipe segment connector above. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting. Next. 19 Zoom out. always connect to pipe segments. and select the return pipe segment again. 23 Watch the listening dimensions. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays.

Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. 27 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Zoom out the view. Next. and press Delete to delete it. 25 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. move the cursor down. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. 26 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. Resolving Pipe Interference | 165 . and draw the pipe around the stairs.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. and split the supply pipe segment 1400mm from the bottom pipe segment connector. you convert a tee fitting. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting. 24 With the Split tool open.

convert the tee fitting from a vertical orientation to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. click Pipe to open the Draw tool.28 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned in the previous lesson. 30 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 166 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and move the cursor to the left. 31 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. 29 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 33 Draw the pipe 4000mm to the left. and after the end point connector snap displays. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. 32 Zoom out the view.

Resolving Pipe Interference | 167 . NOTE When drawing pipe. click to specify the segment end point. 35 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment. and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. and after the connector snap displays.34 Draw the pipe down.

168 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 36 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool. 37 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors.The return pipe run is connected as shown. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 38 Right-click the lower connector. This activates the Draw tool. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe.

click to specify the move start point. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. click (Move). However. First. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu. Second. or width and height. the pipe diameter. specify the move destination or end point. specify the reference or start point of the object that you want to move. 42 Click the pipe segment to select it. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. This needs to be corrected. Notice that the pipe segment is routed in the stairwell wall. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. 43 On the Edit toolbar. IMPORTANT Using the Move tool is a 2-click process. 40 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned.39 In the Type Selector. Resolving Pipe Interference | 169 . 44 Place the cursor over the pipe segment and after the centerline snap displays. Move a pipe segment to correct a routing issue 41 Zoom on the top horizontal pipe segment.

and press ENTER to specify the move end point.45 Move the cursor up. you confirm and resolve pipe interference with the left staircase. The interference has been resolved. Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 47 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). 46 Place the cursor over each pipe run and press TAB twice to check connectivity. Each pipe run and their respective tee fittings highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and after the listening dimensions appear. This moves the pipe segment up 100mm away from the wall but still allowing space for sizing. 170 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Next. Notice that the adjacent pipe segments and fittings parametrically adjust to the move but the rest of the pipe run and the radiators remain unchanged. enter100.

you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section.The section displays in red. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. 53 Zoom in on the stairwell. you may get a false positive result. Resolving Pipe Interference | 171 . 56 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 1500mm from its left connector. 51 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. and split the supply pipe at 3600mm from its left connector. 54 On the Edit toolbar. 55 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. and double-click the section head to open the section view. Otherwise. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown.Piping to make it the active view. 48 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs. select Fine for Detail Level. 52 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . 57 Using the methods that you learned. click (Split). Although this section was used for air systems. watch the listening dimensions. 50 On the View Control Bar. 49 Press ESC.

Remember to watch for connector snaps.You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. 58 Again. using the methods that you learned. 172 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown.

the start point. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. diameter (or width and height). Connecting the Boiler | 173 . enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. Draw. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar.59 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. click File menu ➤ Save. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. Using these 2 methods. Open the m Connecting Boiler. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. (2) Connect to a snap. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). and offset are automatically specified. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. you used the Split. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). the pipe type is also matched. preferably a connector snap. Then. 61 In the Save As dialog. Remember that after you create pipe. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. In the next exercise. and click Save. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. Using Create Similar. 60 If you want to save your work. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs.

You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. the active view is tiled to the left. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler. You will design in the 2 .Piping to make it the active view. the active view is the only open window.This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. TIP When tiling 2 views. 174 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and double-click 2 . 4 Enter WT to tile both windows.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. Note that if this option is unavailable. 3 In the Project Browser.

and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. watch the listening dimensions. This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 2150mm from level 1. Notice that the boiler connector offset is at -2176. Connecting the Boiler | 175 . click Pipe. 14 Move the cursor to the left. Enter -1500 for Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Draw the pipe to the left.8 Zoom in on the boiler.8mm. click to specify the first pipe segment start point. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at 460mm from the boiler connection. and after the connector snap displays. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. This negative offset is based on level 2 because you are designing in the level 2 view. ■ Verify that Angle is cleared. 10 In the Type Selector.

TIP When drawing pipe. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. In a later exercise. and click to specify the end point. after listening dimensions display.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser. 17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. zoom the view and try again. 3275mm from level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. enter -375 for Offset.) to separate snap increments. click to specify the pipe segment end point. 176 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. 15 Draw the pipe up to 900mm.

The boiler supply connector pipe is created. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. and after the connector snap displays. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors. release the mouse button to connect to it. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 177 . 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. 178 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

Connecting the Boiler | 179 . click the tee to display the connectors.Piping view to make it active. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 27 In the 3D Piping view. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active.Next. 24 With the windows tiled. 29 Zoom in on the tee. convert the elbow to a tee fitting with a horizontal orientation. 26 Using the fitting conversion method that you learned. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. 28 Click in the 2 . right-click the right connector. and click it. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run.

34 On the Options Bar. and after listening dimensions display. click to specify the end point. enter -375 for Offset. 36 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. enter 900 and press Enter. 32 Draw the pipe 600mm to the right and click to specify the segment end point. 35 With the Draw tool activated. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 31 On the Options Bar. This creates a 900mm pipe segment. In a later exercise. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 Draw the pipe up. 180 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. connect the right supply pipe run. Verify that -1500 is specified for Offset. Verify that Angle is cleared. and the start point is automatically specified. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 37 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected.

39 Validate the pipe geometry. 38 Check connectivity.The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. Connecting the Boiler | 181 .

182 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 3125mm from level 1. 44 Move the cursor up. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. and the 2 . 46 Draw the pipe up from the boiler 600mm. you draw a 150mm pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. 42 In the Type Selector. Next. and click to specify the end point.Next. verify that 80mm is specified for D: (diameter). 45 On the Options Bar. and right-click the return connector. enter -525 for Offset. and that Auto Connect is selected. and enter 150 and press Enter. Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 40 With the windows tiled. zoom in on the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. 41 Select the boiler. you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. This places the return connection 250mm above level 1. 43 On the Options Bar. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -3396mm from level 2.Piping the active view.

Piping and 3D Piping views are tiled to clearly view the Auto Connect behavior. If Auto Connect is not selected. you draw the return pipe to the left. 48 Draw a pipe segment to the left and under the supply pipe. Auto Connect is available on the Options Bar only when the Draw tool is active. verify that Auto Connect is selected. an automatic connection is made. This routing situation provides an opportunity to learn more about the Auto Connect behavior. the connection is not made.Next. the left return pipe is routed under the supply pipe. As you draw. 47 On the Options Bar. It is important that Auto Connect is not selected. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. Connecting the Boiler | 183 . IMPORTANT Auto Connect allows you to connect an object that you are drawing to an object that is located on a different level or plane. click to specify the end point. If Auto Connect is selected and your selection point overlaps an object on a different level or plane. Make certain that the 2 .

50 Press CTRL+Z to undo the connection and return to the pipe segment. clear Auto Connect. 184 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 51 Select the return pipe segment. and the pipe is automatically connected to the supply pipe above. and click Draw Pipe. 52 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 53 Again. draw the pipe to the left and under the supply pipe.Notice that a green pipe riser symbol displays in the floor plan view. You see it clearly in the 3D view. click to specify the end point. 49 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw tool. and right-click the top connector.

Notice that this time the pipe did not connect to the supply pipe above and a green pipe riser symbol did not display. You now have a better understanding of the Auto Connect. This is caused by the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. On an open pipe segment or run. click the specify the end point. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). If a pipe is hidden by an object. and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. Next. Connecting the Boiler | 185 . To turn off hidden lines. select Hidden Line. In the floor plan view. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. 55 Select the return pipe segment. a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. and twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 56 Draw the pipe to the left. press ESC once to deactivate the Draw tool. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. 54 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. notice that part of the return pipe is hidden as it passes under the supply pipe. TIP When drawing pipe. you finish connecting the boiler to both return pipe runs. and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. If the pipe segment or run is closed. right-click the left connector and click Draw Pipe. press it once to stop drawing the current object. press ESC to deactivate the tool.

The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. 60 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. 58 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. click to connect to the left return pipe run.57 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run. 186 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and after the connector snap displays. 59 Zoom in on the boiler. convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls.

62 Draw the pipe 300mm to the right. and click to specify the end point. Connecting the Boiler | 187 . and click Draw Pipe. and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. 63 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run.61 Select the tee fitting. right-click the right connector. click to specify the end point.

and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. 65 Click Modify on the Design Bar. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 66 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting.64 Using the method that you learned. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run. 188 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe.

68 Using the section view creation method that you learned. and adjust the view as shown.67 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. draw a section view. you create a section view to verify the clearance between the return pipe riser and the boiler. Next. Connecting the Boiler | 189 .

under Graphics. This locates the Section 5 view under Piping in the Project Browser and removes the ??? label. click Fine for Detail Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections. 74 Zoom on the boiler return pipe to validate the pipe geometry and check the clearance between the pipe riser and the boiler. 190 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . and click Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 72 In the Element Properties dialog. 70 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. and click OK. 71 Right-click in the drawing area. select Piping for Sub-Discipline. You can also double-click the section head to open the section view.69 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 73 On the View Control Bar. double-click Section 5 to open the Section 5 view.

in the 2 . and after highlights. click to specify the alignment reference point. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. 77 On the Tools toolbar.75 Close the Section 5 view but keep the 2 tiled views open. click (Align). If the Tools toolbar is not available. Connecting the Boiler | 191 . 78 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe. select the reference point where you want to align. 76 With the 2 .Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. and then you select the point to align. First. Next. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes.Piping view.

click to specify the point to align. and after the centerline highlights.NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. 192 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 79 Move the cursor over the left return pipe.

81 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe. Connecting the Boiler | 193 . 80 Using the alignment method you just learned.

and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. 194 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 82 Place the cursor below the tee fitting. Notice that the return pipe runs also parametrically adjusted. 83 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view. This is because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that we aligned.The aligned return pipes are as shown.

connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. navigate to the folder of your choice. and double-click 2 .rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and after it highlights.The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name. Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 195 . you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. Open the m Pipe Sizing . You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs.Friction & Velocity. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. you size the supply and return piping runs. In the next exercise. 84 If you want to save your work. you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Finally. press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler. and click to select them. 85 In the Save As dialog. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. and click Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Piping to make it the active view. Next. click the Training Files icon.

Select And. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select a different layout solution. Under Constraints. select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing. ■ Click OK. 196 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the pipe.00 Pa/m. Either relocate the system components. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing. and that Restrict Size is cleared. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 3 On the Options Bar. The sized pipe runs are sized.The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog. and enter 250. select Friction. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. and enter 2.5 m/s for Velocity. click Sizing.

This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry. 9 In the Save As dialog.Friction & Velocity Training for File name. enter Pipe Sizing . you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. In this exercise. 8 If you want to save your work. and click Save. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. In the next exercise.Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. Placing Circulator Pumps In this exercise. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. click File menu ➤ Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. 6 In the Project Browser. you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Placing Circulator Pumps | 197 .

the active view is the only open window. zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 1 In the Project Browser. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views.Piping to make it the active view. 3 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2 .Piping view. Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active. the active view is tiled to the left. Open the m Placing Circulator Pumps. Note that if this option is unavailable.Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You place the pumps in the 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. 198 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 . 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

7 On the Edit toolbar. and make 2 splits on the left pipe 160mm from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown. select M_In-line Circulator : M_Standard. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. 8 Watch the listening dimensions. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted. 14 Place the cursor over to the left of the pipe opening. Placing Circulator Pumps | 199 . You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. 13 In the Type Selector. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. 12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. 9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. and after the centerline snap displays. click (Split). and press Spacebar to rotate the pump. click Mechanical Equipment. 15 Move the cursor over the pipe opening. The selected pipe segment displays in red. click to place the circulator pump.

200 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.TIP If you want to reposition the circulator pump. drag the pump away from the pipe. 17 In the 3D Piping view. 16 Press ESC twice. You can also use the Move tool for precise placement. and watch for the centerline snaps. and then move it over the pipe opening.

click the pump. To clear the selection. click the pipe segment. click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 19 On the Options Bar.Actually. 22 In the 2 . The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 Click OK. or press ESC. under Constraints. click . Placing Circulator Pumps | 201 .Piping view. and after the connector snap displays. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. you can click in the drawing area. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value. release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.Piping view. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. click in the drawing area to clear the selection. You can also right-click the pump. If the pump remains selected. 18 In the 2 . The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Element Properties. you connect the pump. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset. enter -1500 for Offset. click Modify on the Design Bar. The selected pump displays in red. 23 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump. Next. the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. After connecting the pump. 26 Place the cursor over the pump. 202 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 24 Press ESC to clear the selection. 25 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above. you need to check connectivity. and press TAB.

Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 27 Using the methods that you just learned. you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top. 28 With the 2 . and check connectivity.The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Placing Circulator Pumps | 203 . 29 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view. Next. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left. connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe.

rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. 31 Click the rotation control on the right. 204 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .30 Click the left pump to display rotation controls. 32 Using the method that you just learned. The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

These unassigned components are located in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system. Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. they move to their respective system folder. select the left supply pipe riser. do the following: ■ ■ Expand the Unassigned folder. You can also press F9. Immediately after placement. click System Browser. 35 In the 3D Piping view. Placing Circulator Pumps | 205 . You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system.The in-line circulator pumps are rotated. Expand the Piping folder. After you assign the components to a system. you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment. and so on) that you placed to a system. Assign the pumps to the supply system 33 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. System tools display on the Options Bar. 34 In the System Browser. As you learned in previous exercises.

They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. and by clicking the rotation controls. such as VAV boxes. 40 If you want to save your work. boilers and AC units. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. 37 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish System. In this exercise. click Add To System. you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure. 38 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system. NOTE Do not click .TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar. you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 206 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . pressure. Inspecting Piping Systems In this exercise. Using the System Inspector. If you use this tool. you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow. and click Save. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Finally. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. 39 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. click (Edit System). navigate to the folder of your choice. 36 On the Options Bar. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name. Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. 41 In the Save As dialog.

System tools appear on the Options Bar. fitting.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Inspect from the context menu. 4 Select the boiler. 2 Right-click in the view. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. and pressure information including pressure loss. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. 5 On the Options Bar. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number. click the Training Files icon. select any pipe segment. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. and click OK. click (Inspect). System tools display on the Options Bar. Open the m Inspecting Piping Systems. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. and double-click 2 . 6 In the Select a System dialog.Piping to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. mechanical equipment.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. flow. and so on that you have assigned to a system. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. After the System Inspector activates. select Hydronic Supply 1. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler. NOTE To select a system. click Inspect. Inspecting Piping Systems | 207 . Right-click a system from the System Browser. click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. also known as the critical path.IMPORTANT As you inspect a system. you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. 208 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump. As you inspect. Next.

Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them. double-click the 3D Piping view. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector. use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. and for pipe sizing. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). In this exercise. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected. navigate to the folder of your choice. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. 18 In the Save As dialog. and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. In this exercise. you check the piping systems. and quickly target those systems that need attention. enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name. Checking Piping Systems | 209 . click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. flow. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. and inspect a fin-tube radiator. 17 If you want to save your work. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 16 Using the methods that you learned. click File menu ➤ Save. and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you confirm the system component assignments. thus assigning the components to a system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. A message appears indicating the no warning were found. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. As a tutorial exercise. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. check system warnings may occur. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system.Piping to make it the active view. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Warnings display. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. In the System Browser. then press F9. Next. The piping system is logically and physically valid. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Open the m Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar.” 4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. Next. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty. After you assign the system components to a system. However. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. click the Training Files icon. click Check Duct Systems. If the System Browser does not respond. right-click the Design Bar. and click Piping. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. the pipe is now associated with that system. click in the drawing area to make it active. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators. double-click the 2 . Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. For example. and for pipe sizing. 210 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems . click Check Pipe Systems. Then. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system.

Piping to make it the active view. double-click 2 Mech to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser. The supply system that you created. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. click Close. you confirm the piping system assignments. fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems. TIP If you have multiple views open. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . and click Expand All. Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler. otherwise. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed.Because you assigned all piping components. The red lines represent the default logical connection. 6 In the Project Browser. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply. 10 Using the same methods. and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components. you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. Checking Piping Systems | 211 . Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air.

For pipe offset. In this tutorial. navigate to the folder of your choice.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. 16 If you want to save your work. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. The completed mechanical systems are included in the m Completed Mechanical Systems. it is a valid system without problems. In this exercise. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. a boiler. 15 Using the methods that you learned.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. circulator pumps. For additional practice. 3D. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe connections and creating logical systems. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2008. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. and fin-tube radiators. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. Finally. Depending on your air systems design. open the m Completed Mechanical Systems. you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). and section views. 212 | Chapter 2 Mechanical Systems .Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. click File menu ➤ Save. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. 17 In the Save As dialog. the creation and modification methods remained the same. Explore different system designs. In the lesson. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. and click Save. Design the system in the 1 . parametrically modify those designs. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. specify 2975mm for the supply and 2825mm for the return pipe offset elevation.

213 .autodesk. However. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. go to http://www. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn to create electrical systems within the architectural model of a building project.Electrical Systems 3 In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial datasets are not present. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

power distribution systems. then applying the appropriate template to each plan.Planning Electrical Systems In this lesson you specify electrical settings. 3 Click Wiring Types. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. and in the right pane. Later. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. By creating views that are specific to the electrical system you will be able to design. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. analyze. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans. and demand factors that you will use in your project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You will create the following views for Level 1 and Level 2: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. in the left pane. For example. in the Element Properties dialog for Rooms. wiring. The lighting and power plans are created by copying and renaming architectural views. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Electrical Views. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. and select the component families that you will use in the plan. has been set to 2300 mm for the building used with these exercises. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. and modify your lighting and electrical systems in later exercises. For this reason. wiring. create views for the power and lighting systems at each level in the building. and click Add. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels. The electrical settings determine the voltages. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. the Limit Offset. click the Training Files icon. distribution systems. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. apply templates to your views.rvt. expand Wiring. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in rooms are above the ceiling level. and prepare the electrical views that you will need to design the electrical system for your project. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Value CU-THWN Copper 75 214 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system.

00 V 490. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V 460. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions.00 V 277. By specifying a range. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 277 480 Value 120.Parameter Insulation Max Size Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value THWN 500 1.00 V Maximum 130.00 V 480.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 215 . For example. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00 V 260. Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V Minimum 110.00 V 200.00 V 280.00 V 220.00 V 208. click Voltage Definitions.

For example. 216 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 480/277 Wye Phase Three Three Configuration Wye Wye Wires 4 4 L-L 208 480 L-G 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. 8 In the right pane. click Distribution Systems. you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. this type of system (High. 9 Click Demand Factors. Red. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. even though this is physically impossible.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage.

000VA 10. For example. for Name. Power. create another copy of level 1. 13 In the Rename View dialog. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. HVAC. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10.Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3. and click OK. A new view called Copy of Level 1 is created. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. Create views for your electrical plans 11 In the Project Browser. or Other systems in your project based on their load.000VA. 14 Using the same method. 12 Right-click Copy of Level 1. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. 10 Click OK. leave the default settings as shown here.000VA.000VA 3. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. enter 1-Power. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. and rename it 1-Lighting. ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. For this exercise. at any given time. and rename them as follows: ■ ■ 2-Power 2-Lighting Preparing the Electrical Plan | 217 . and click Rename. Create 2 copies of the level 2 floor plan.000VA 10. right-click Level 1.

which places the view under the Electrical branch in the project browser. 16 Right-click Copy of Level 1. click Lighting Plan. 21 In the Project Browser. TIP The Select View Template dialog can also be accessed from the View menu. enter 1-Ceiling Elec for Name. 18 Repeat the previous 3 steps to create a 2-Ceiling Elec ceiling plan. The 1-Ceiling Elec view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Ceiling ➤ Ceiling Plans branch in the project browser. and click OK. expand Electrical ➤ Devices. select the following families: ■ ■ M_Lighting Switches. 22 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. select Electrical Ceiling from the list of templates. the view discipline.rfa M_Receptacle. The templates also specify the sub-discipline for each view. expand Families. and click OK. 20 In the Select View Template dialog. Now that you have created views specifically for electrical information. and click Rename. 23 In the Project Browser. The 1-Power view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. you need to apply settings. and apply the Electrical Ceiling Plan template to the 2-Ceiling Elec view. and the view range. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. View templates let you easily control view properties. 17 In the Rename View dialog. 24 In the Select View Template dialog. 19 In the Project Browser.rfa 29 Click Open. 27 In the Open dialog.Create views for your electrical ceiling plans Ceiling grid patterns (only visible in ceiling plans) let you correctly lay out lighting fixtures. 25 Using the same method. right-click Level 1. which further defines their position in the project browser. and click OK. and Electrical Ceiling templates that you will apply to your new views control the visibility of component categories. apply the Lighting Plan template to the 2-Lighting view. In the following steps you will create a ceiling plan for each level by copying and renaming the ceiling plans that the architect has already created. which are available from view templates. right-click 1-Power. right-click 1-Lighting. Lighting Plan. and click Apply View Template. apply the Power Plan template to 2-Power. expand Ceiling Plans. and click OK. The Power Plan. select Power Plan from the list of templates. right-click 1-Ceiling Elec. Apply templates to views Each of the templates that you will apply to your new views specify Electrical for the view discipline. 30 In the Project Browser. Load component families 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 218 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 28 While pressing Ctrl. 15 In the Project Browser. and causes the architectural components to be dimmed in the view. The 1-Lighting view is placed under a newly created Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans branch in the project browser. and click Apply View Template.

and so on).rfa 32 Open the Electrical folder again and load the M_Troffer Corner Insert. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser. and established the parameters for your wiring.rfa electrical family from the Lighting Fixtures folder. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 219 . 33 You can save the open file if you wish. has also been added under Lighting Device. conference rooms. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.Surface. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors. Later. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. reopen the Electrical folder.rvt. Open the provided dataset. selected components for your electrical systems. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. click Add. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Lighting Levels. and load the following electrical families from the Equipment folder: ■ ■ ■ M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers.Notice that an Electrical Fixtures ➤ M_Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. As you loaded each of the component families. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of rooms in your project. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. containing several switch types. in the Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. In this case the key style is the type of room and. “Defining Required Lighting Levels” on page 219.rfa M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .rfa M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. distribution systems. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. A Lighting Devices ➤ M_Lighting Switches folder. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the rooms within your project. 31 Using the same method. restrooms. as described below. click the Training Files icon. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of rooms (offices. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. voltages.Surface. In this exercise. Under Parameter Data. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans.

double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on room type. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Rooms under Electrical-Lighting in the Room Element Properties dialog. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . Select Instance. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser. and when the cross-hairs display. move the cursor over the room in the upper-left corner. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each room. 220 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . enter Room Lighting Requirements. 4 Click OK twice. you can look at the properties for one of the rooms. select Illuminance. select Rooms. select Electrical-Lighting. there are many rooms in this project that have similar lighting requirements.Lighting category. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Rooms for Category. click to select the room. For Type. click (Properties). select Electrical. For Group. 8 Click Cancel. To verify this.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. For Name. ■ Click Schedule keys. The new parameter you have just created applies to all rooms in the project. However. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 7 On the Options Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. Under Categories.

The key schedule displays in the drawing area. one for each type of room in the building. ■ Click OK. click New 7 times to add 7 rows in the key schedule. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. the Key Schedule should looks like this: Defining Required Lighting Levels | 221 . Enter a room type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of rooms in the project. enter Lighting Levels.■ For Key Name. 12 Click OK. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each room type. The new rows are added with 1 through 7 as the default Key Names. according to the values in the following table: Room Type Private Office Open Office Lounge Restroom Conference Mech/Elec Stair/Circulation Lighting Level (lx) 325 540 270 325 375 215 215 When completed. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the Room component. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list.

Lighting category. click Properties and. 20 Click OK. In a worksharing environment. and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 540 lx. in the Element Properties dialog. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. 19 Scroll up to the Electrical . and other users would not be able to perform operations covered in this exercise. then right-click. select multiple rooms of the same type (for example. The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Room Lighting Requirements key schedule. this view might well be part of a workset checked out by the architect. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining rooms in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple rooms of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog. In the Project Browser. Assign room keys to the rooms in the project 15 In the Project Browser. and for Lighting Level parameter. under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. under Instance Parameters. 16 Zoom in on the large open area in the center of the floor plan. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Using the same method. and click Element Properties. and select Open Office. the value that you entered for this room type in the key schedule. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. While pressing Ctrl. then right-click one of the selections. For tutorial purposes. assume you would have full access to this view. right-click in the Room Lighting Requirements schedule. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected rooms. NOTE Generally. Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Number 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Open 1 Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Office Stairwell Office Office Office Key Name Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 222 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . scroll down to the Identity Data category. the Level 1 floor plan would be thought of as the architect’s view. 17 Move the cursor over the room until a cross-hair displays. Office). click .TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Consequently.Level Level 1 Level 1 Level 1 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Level 2 Number 19 20 21 2 6 7 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical/Electrical Open 2 Office Office Office Rest Room (Men) Rest Room (Ladies) Mechanical / Electrical Lounge Office Office Office Office Stairwell Conference Room Office Office Key Name Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Open Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Restroom Mech/Elec Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. you could create a key schedule named Room Variables. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels | 223 . In this exercise you will create a room color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values according to room type. Room color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. selecting a room type for your new Room Variables parameter in a room’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component. Room color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the room components. Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to rooms based on specific room parameters. Open the provided dataset. as described below. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. “Assigning Room Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels” on page 223. if required. For example. In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the rooms in your project.

8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Rooms for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Architectural ➤ New Construction ➤ Floor Plans. 224 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Color Fills. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. and click OK. double-click the Level 1 floor plan to make it the active view. enter Required Lighting Levels. select Show Title. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Required Lighting.rvt. click Color Scheme Legend. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 6 For Color. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. 14 Click OK twice. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click OK. select Underline.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. click the Training Files icon. for Name. select Required Lighting . and click OK. and click (Duplicate). Under Title Text. select Required Lighting Level. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. and place it in the drawing. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for the Color. 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Required Lighting Level. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. for Title. and click Element Properties.

16 Make the Level 2 floor plan the active view. 17 Using the same method, activate the color scheme as you did for Level 1. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. You can have more than one color scheme in the project, but only one per plan. 18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for rooms, or for any parameter that you want to create for a room (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise).

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels
In this exercise you create a room lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each room against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project, you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/- 55 lx range specified in the schedule. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Room Schedule Lighting Requirements.rvt.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 225

Create room lighting analysis schedule
1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Rooms. For Name, enter Room Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Click OK.

3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, scroll down the Available fields list, double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane

Create a new schedule parameter
4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog, click Calculated Value. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, enter Average Estimated Illumination - Required Lighting Level.

NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab:
■ ■ ■

For Sort by, select Number. Verify that Ascending is selected. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected.

8 On the Formatting tab, under fields, select Lighting Delta. 9 Click Conditional Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Field, select Lighting Delta. For Test, select Not Between. For Value, enter -55 lx and 55 lx in the text boxes.

226 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

11 Click the Background Color chip. 12 In the Color dialog, under Basic colors, click the red color chip. 13 Click OK twice. 14 On the Formatting tab, under Fields, select Ceiling Reflectance, and click Field Format. 15 In the Format dialog:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use default settings. For Units, verify that Fixed is selected. For Rounding, select 2 decimal places.

16 Click OK. 17 Using the same method, specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields. 18 Click OK.

19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next lesson, “Designing the Electrical System” on page 228. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the rooms as 0. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the rooms. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each room, and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. This is because the value is not within the range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. In this exercise, you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project.

Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 227

Designing the Electrical System
In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices, electrical equipment, and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. Once the equipment is in place, you will create power and lighting circuits, and make connections to electrical equipment.

Adding Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. As you select and place lighting fixtures, the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each room’s lighting requirement. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Adding Lighting Fixtures.rvt.

Place the initial lighting fixture
1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules, and double-click Room Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column, and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance, Wall Reflectance, Floor Reflectance, and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Only the Number, Name, Average Estimated Lighting, and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. NOTE Right-click a heading, and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. 4 On the Windows menu, click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. 6 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 1-Ceiling Elec to make it the active view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid, and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view. 7 On the Windows menu, click Tile, and arrange the windows as shown.

228 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

8 In the 1-Ceiling Elec view, zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Light Fixture. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 3 Lamp, and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 11 With the cursor in the room in the upper-left corner of the plan, click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection.

12 Click Modify. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture, select it, and on the Toolbar, click (Move).

14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture, and when Endpoint displays, click to specify the start point.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 229

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture, and click when Intersection displays.

In the Room Lighting Analysis Schedule, the Lighting Delta for room 3 is changed from -325 lx to -118 lx, closer to the required +/- 55 lx. The current line weight settings for the lighting fixture and ceiling grid make it difficult to distinguish the outline of the lighting fixture from the ceiling grid lines. Adjusting the line weight for the lighting fixtures will make it easier to place the remaining lighting fixtures.

Change line weight to adjust lighting fixture visibility
16 Right-click anywhere on the view background, and click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Reflected Ceiling Plan: 1-Ceiling Elec dialog, scroll down to Lighting Fixtures, click in the Projection/Surface-Lines column, and click Override. 19 In the Line Graphics dialog, under Lines, for Weight, select 5. 20 Click OK 3 times.

230 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

The fixture you placed now displays as shown.

Copy and place additional lighting fixtures
21 Select the lighting fixture, and on the Toolbar, click 22 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. 23 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point, and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of the level 1, as shown. (Copy).

Check the illumination levels against the Room Lighting Analysis schedule
24 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 231

The Average Estimated Illumination for rooms 3, 4 and 5 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 325 lx, but is still not within the +/- 55 lx range, so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these rooms.

To adjust the illumination level downward, you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each room with a 2-lamp fixture. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.

Change lighting fixture type
25 In the 1-Ceiling Elec, select one of the lighting fixtures in each room, and in the Type Selector, select M_Troffer Corner Insert : M_600x1200 2Lamp. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. If you select a component inadvertently, press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. 26 Again, check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range.

The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/- 55 lx range. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. 27 Using the same method, continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1-Ceiling Elec and 2-Ceiling Elec views. Use the Room Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. When you are finished, only the Mechanical/Electrical rooms (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Room Lighting Analysis schedule. Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 are shown below along with the Room Lighting Analysis schedule.

232 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 1

NOTE Ceiling grids were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical rooms; therefore, you cannot add lighting fixtures to these rooms.
Level 2

Adding Lighting Fixtures | 233

28 In the Room Lighting Analysis schedule, right-click one of the headings, and click Unhide All Columns.

With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms, your Lighting Delta column for all of the rooms should be white. 29 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 Proceed to the next exercise, “Placing Lighting Switches” on page 234. In this exercise, you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans, and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in “Creating a Room Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels” on page 225.

Placing Lighting Switches
In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Switches.rvt.

Place switches in rooms
1 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 2 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 3 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole. 4 On the Options Bar, verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

5 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of room 3.

234 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host, it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the room as shown, and click to place the switch.

7 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining rooms in the 1-Lighting view as shown.
Level 1

8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, and in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way. 9 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 235

10 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

11 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Four Way. 12 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown.

236 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

13 In the open office area, place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown.

14 In the Project Browser, double-click 2-Lighting to make it the active view. 15 In the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Three Way, and place a switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown.

Placing Lighting Switches | 237

16 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan, and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office, and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell, as shown.

17 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise, placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset, and go on to the next exercise. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset. On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device, in the Type Selector, select M_Lighting Switches : M_Single Pole, and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown.

238 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

Level 2

18 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 20 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Placing Power Receptacles” on page 239.

Placing Power Receptacles
In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Receptacles.rvt.

Place wall-hosted receptacles
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 4 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard.

Placing Power Receptacles | 239

5 On the Options Bar, verify that

(Place on Vertical Face) is selected.

6 In the left side of the plan, place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown.

7 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown, including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas.

240 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

1-Power

2-Power

Placing Power Receptacles | 241

Place floor-hosted receptacles
8 In the Project Browser, double-click 1-Power. 9 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar, click Device. 10 In the Type Selector, select M_Receptacle : M_Standard. 11 On the Options Bar, click (Place on Work Plane), and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected for Plane.

NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar. The current level is selected by default. 12 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office, and place a receptacle on the floor as shown.

When placing a receptacle on a workplane, its connector is located below the level of the workplane. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures, it is important that the connector be within the Room to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. In the next steps, you will flip the workplane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the workplane. Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles.

13 Select the receptacle and click the room). 14 On the Toolbar, click (Copy).

(Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the workplane (within

15 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. 16 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point, and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor, as shown.

242 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

17 Draw a pick box around the four floor-based receptacles, click , select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure, place 3 copies of the flipped receptacles throughout the Level 1 open office, as shown.

18 Using the same procedure, place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2-Power as shown. TIP You can select all of the floor hosted receptacles in the 1-Power view, then copy and paste them in the 2-Power view. Select all 1-Power floor receptacles, click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard, open 2-Power, and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. 19 You can save the open file if you wish; a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Placing Power Receptacles | 243

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports” on page 244. In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components, because it is quite common in Revit MEP.

Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports
In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. With the introduction of local energy codes, the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces, you can refer to this report rather than having to measure rooms and count fixtures. Open the provided dataset, as described below. Dataset:
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Usage Reports.rvt. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, scroll down the Category list, and select Rooms. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected, and for Name, enter Power & Lighting Usage. 4 Click OK. 5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area

6 Click OK. A schedule is created similar to the one shown.

244 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems

In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). you need to create logical connections to define the topology. as described below. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. “Placing Electrical Equipment” on page 245. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model. Dataset: ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.7 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Placing Electrical Equipment | 245 . and work toward the higher voltage. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. Open the provided dataset. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

6 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. Add a transformer 10 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical room to the right of the panel as shown. select M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down to the Electrical . This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building.Loads category. 9 Click OK.rvt.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Right-click the panel. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Electrical . click the Training Files icon. 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room between the 2 restrooms. select M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : M_45kVA.Loads.Surface : M_250A. click Element Properties. and click to place the panel as shown. for Distribution Sys. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected. select 480/277 Wye. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Placing Electrical Equipment. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. 3 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. 246 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click Electrical Equipment. click . and double-click 1-Power. 4 In the Type Selector. select Electrical Equipment. under Instance Parameters. and for Panel Name.

12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. scroll down to the Electrical . select Electrical Equipment. for Distribution Sys. under Instance Parameters. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click Modify. select 120/208 Wye.Surface : M_100A. Placing Electrical Equipment | 247 .Loads category. 23 Click OK. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the panel you just placed. for Distribution Sys. select M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and place the panel to the right of the transformer. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System. click . and on the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. select 120/208 Wye. 16 Click OK. enter L-1. For Panel Name. click . 18 In the Type Selector. Since this is a transformer. scroll down to the Electrical . enter T1. 14 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and for Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye.Loads category. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

Surface : M_250A named H-2 M_480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: M_45kVA named T2 M_208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click (Create Power Circuit).Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. 27 Click (Select Panel). The temporary circuit displays as shown. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. select panel L-2. and select panel H-2 for Panel. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ M_480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 248 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 26 On the Options Bar. . click .Surface : M_100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. In this case you are going to select something other than the panel. 28 On the Options Bar. and click 30 On the Options Bar. Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. 29 Select the transformer T2.

34 In the 2-Power view. and on the Options Bar. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. click 35 On the Option Bar. and select the T1 transformer as the panel. 37 Close the 2-Power view. 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical rooms side-by-side. and select the MDP panel. 38 On the Options Bar. select the L-1 panel. 36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. and click 39 Click . . Placing Electrical Equipment | 249 . select the H-2 panel. click . and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. .31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area.

In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project.40 Select the T1 transformer. 250 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . “Creating Power Circuitry” on page 250. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click 41 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Power Circuitry. click . You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. lighting.rvt. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. . 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 42 You can save the open file if you wish. as described below. and data systems. click the Training Files icon. Circuits are used for power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and select the MDP panel. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Open the provided dataset.

Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. Creating Power Circuitry | 251 . For now. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner room. You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise. load (180 VA). and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. 3 While pressing Ctrl. click .2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. and voltage (120 V). 4 On the Options Bar. A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. select all the receptacles in the corner room. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit.

The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. 8 On the Options Bar.Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner room so that it is highlighted. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). press Tab. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the room. 10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. click circuit. 6 Click Modify. and select panel L-1 as the panel for this NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar. 252 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click to select the circuit again. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. and press Tab.

and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. which are the wire sizes for the load. neutral. respectively for this circuit. click . Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. If you select L-1 in the drawing. 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. 19 Close the warning message. under Instance Parameters. change the value from 20A to 50A.Loads category. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. and click Element Properties. The editable parameters include Wire Type and Rating will be discussed in a later exercise. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. creating power circuits. 15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. click Cancel Circuit. Creating Power Circuitry | 253 . select Circuit Properties. 1-#6. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. . all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. scroll down to the Electrical . 1-#10. 12 On the Edit Circuit tab on the Design Bar. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a room-by-room basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell. click . notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. and ground wiring. click (Edit Circuit). 1-#12.11 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. The currently specified values are 1-#12. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. and add it to panel L-1. and select panel L-1. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. When editing a circuit. click The circuit is created. 16 On the Design Bar. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. 22 Click OK. 1-#12. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. and select panel L-1.

as previously described. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. 254 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 29 Select the L-1 panel. click . and then select panel L-1. 28 Double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). create circuits in the 2-Power view and assign them to panel L-2. 26 Continue creating circuits. 27 Using the same procedures. These will be connected in a later exercise. and on the Options Bar.24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. 25 On the Options Bar. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. These will be connected in a later exercise. click .

Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 255 . as described below.In the Edit Circuits dialog. 30 Click OK. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. Adding wiring to a project is optional. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 3 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. “Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires” on page 255. In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. you have assigned only 17. Finally. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. As you saw in the previous exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project.

6 On the Options Bar. 7 Close the message window and. as shown. click (Filter). click Check None to clear all the check boxes. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 8 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 256 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click . This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). 5 In the Filter dialog. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected.

click . and then select panel MDP as the panel for the circuit. as in this step. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 257 . Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls. or floors. click . This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. click . 10 On the Options Bar.9 On the Options Bar. When creating wires. ceilings. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring.

add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the large room and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. and click OK. lighting fixtures. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. and click OK. In the next steps. and click the switch to select the switches.In this step. ground) in the wire run. you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. 16 Using the same method. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 11 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click . When this occurs. for Hot Conductors. Splined wiring is similar to arc. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. and one ground conductor). click . Later. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. and click OK. and assign the circuits to panel MDP. neutral. 13 In the Filter dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. select Wires. you created arc type wiring. you can specify splined wiring. one neutral conductor. click Check None. but with an additional vertex. when you create wiring manually. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. 12 On the Options Bar. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 258 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. press Tab. 17 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. under Instance Parameters. enter 2. enter 2 as the value.

and assign the circuits to panel H-2. and restrooms in the 2-Lighting view. assign the circuit to panel H-2. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1-Lighting view. NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit. conference room. 19 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 259 . Otherwise. These will be connected in a later exercise. lounge. then creating lighting circuits in 2-Lighting. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. 20 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices.18 For more practice.

260 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. 2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2.rvt. click (Create Switch System). 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you will create a room schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. and specify switch IDs for switches. and panel information. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. assign lighting fixtures to switches. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Switch Systems. and double-click 1-Lighting to make it the active view. as described below. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. click the Training Files icon.21 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. “Creating Switch Systems” on page 260. After creating the switch systems on Level 1. 3 On the Options Bar. Open the provided dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. but does not prevent you from doing so.

select Multiple. 7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. and on the Options Bar. 6 On the Edit Switch System tab. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding the switch). After creating the switch system. The Edit Switch System tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Finish to confirm your selections. The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. click Remove From System. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. click (Edit Switch System). ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. With Multiple selected on the Options Bar.4 Click (Select Switch for System). Creating Switch Systems | 261 . 5 On the Options Bar.

and select the switch on the wall outside the ladies’ restroom. and click OK. The Number of Fixtures field now displays 26 fixtures remaining in the system. click Select Switch. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. 15 On the Edit Switch System tab. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan.West. click Finish. 262 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish System. click 14 Click . under Instance Properties.1st Floor. for Switch ID. for Switch ID. 18 On the Edit Switch System tab. click Finish System. click . and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. enter North Stairwell . 20 Click . under Instance Properties. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Switch Properties.8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Edit Switch System tab. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter Main Entrance . . 9 Click Switch Properties.

double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. enter Room Number. For Name. 28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating Switch Systems | 263 . and restrooms in the 1-Lighting view. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Click OK. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. scroll down the Available fields list. select Number. enter Switch Systems. select Rooms. 26 On the Formatting tab. Verify that Ascending is selected. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties. and for Heading.21 Using the same method. scroll down the Available fields list. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Number from the Fields list. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. stairwell.

The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. 31 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 264 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. Specify Open Area . “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264. click the Training Files icon. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. and private offices. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open the provided dataset. 30 For more practice. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. In the left pane of the Open dialog. conference room. Otherwise. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. as described below. Create separate systems for the lounge. “Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs” on page 264.2nd Floor for the switch ID. and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. restrooms. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the room containing that system. continue creating switch systems in the 2-Lighting view.

verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining rooms along the left side of the plan. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper rooms are visible. 1 In the Project Browser. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 265 . 5 Using the same method.■ Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. 3 In the corner room.rvt. 8 On the Basics tab on the Design Bar. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 9 On the Options Bar. click Wire. 2 Zoom in on the room at the upper-left corner of the plan. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. and delete both home runs. 6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper rooms.

266 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . as shown. 11 Click in the open space near the door for the room to specify the second point for the wire. 12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle room to specify the endpoint for the wire.10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top room to specify the start point for the wire.

when the wiring is completed. When completed. and using the same method. your layout should look similar to the following: Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 267 . 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower rooms are visible.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower rooms. The direction will be corrected. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run. if necessary.

18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. 17 Right click the wire run. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower room as shown. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. 268 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . 14 Click Modify.Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. a shared neutral. and a shared safety ground). select Insert Vertex. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower room. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. as each room was added to the wiring run. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the number of hot conductors. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. In the previous steps. and click.

Completed 1-Power Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 269 . adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1-Power and 2-Power views. The wire behaves like a spline. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. 19 For additional practice.Vertices let you route wires in your project views.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.rvt. 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner room is visible. In this exercise. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. as described below. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 270 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 1 In the Project Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. “Checking Your Design ” on page 270. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Checking Your Design. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. Open the provided dataset. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. and double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.

and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1-Power. 8 In the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser.4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. and click Select. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP). The System Browser also provides the name and number of the room in which the devices are located. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. 5 Resize the columns in the System Browser until all of the columns are visible without scrolling. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. collapse Power. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 6 Right-click in a column heading in the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. Checking Your Design | 271 . and 5 receptacles in the open area of Level 2. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. and expand Unassigned. release the mouse button. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1.

11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. click to create permanent wiring. and on the Options Bar. The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2-Lighting view have not yet been connected. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. 272 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . click . 16 Click Finish Circuit. 15 Click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. 13 In the 1-Lighting view. click Add to Circuit. press Tab. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2. 17 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell.10 Open the 1-Lighting and 2-Lighting views and close any windows. 14 On the Edit Circuits tab on the Design Bar. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. In the System Browser. click to select the circuit. 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown.

19 On the Options Bar. click the title bar of the 2-Lighting view. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. select Wires. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 23 In the Project Browser. click Check None. enter 2. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. Checking Your Design | 273 . and click OK. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. In the System Browser. 24 In the drawing area. click . highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit. and click OK. 20 In the Filter dialog. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. under Instance Parameters. for Hot Conductors. 21 Click . the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. 18 In the 1-Lighting view. 25 On the Options Bar. press Tab. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view.

select panel L-1. create a power circuit for the 5 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. 28 Using the same method. click 27 Click . The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category. 30 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. click Check Circuits. Check Circuits 29 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. to create permanent wiring. 274 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . and in the Mechanical/Electrical room.26 On the Options Bar.

35 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. 33 Close the Warning dialog. Defining Circuit Loads | 275 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. Finally.31 Click to view details of the warning. Open the provided dataset. In this exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 32 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. as described below. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Metric ➤ Electrical ➤ m Defining Circuit Loads.rvt. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. “Defining Circuit Loads” on page 275. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected.

while Phase A provides 4500 VA. 3 On the Options Bar. and C shows a slight imbalance with the heaviest load on Phase B (4860 VA). and Phase C provides 4140 VA. In the Project Browser. 276 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. B.Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Rebalance Loads. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 2 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. and double-click 2-Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. select panel L-2. 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Examination of the loads on Phase A. click .

a load of 12780 VA. and 6 feed transformer T1. click .After re-balancing loads. 4. 10 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 6 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. the H-2 panel. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. Had there been a greater imbalance. and circuits 7. enter 100A for the Trip value. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. and 11 feed panel H-2. you may see different values for the loads. enter 40A for the Trip value. and on the Options Bar. so no further changes are required. 13 In the Type Selector. The values on the right side shows the load presented by transformer T1 (12780 VA). Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. 8 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. 12 In 1-Power view. Therefore. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. After the loads are balanced. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Select panel H-2. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. double-click 1-Power. Circuits 2. L-1 and MDP. Therefore. and the T1 transformer. Defining Circuit Loads | 277 . click . the load connected to it is less than 15kVA. and on the Options Bar. a load of 18844 VA. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. H-2 is a 100A panel. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. select M_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. you can use a 30kVA transformer. the distribution is shifted. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel MDP. 11 Click OK. for panel H-2. and for T1. the values for circuits 1 and 3 are the load presented by the lighting circuits on Level 1 (5664 VA). select the T1 transformer. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. 9. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same.

click (Circuit Properties). but must be reconnected to the power circuits. 18 Click OK. for transformer T2. on the Options Bar.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. 278 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems . Notice that it changes to 3-#3. double-click 2-Power to make it the active view. . enter 100A for Rating. select panel H-2. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA.14 In the Error dialog.00A. 26 In the Edit Circuits dialog. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Verify/adjust wire sizes 16 Right-click panel L-1. 25 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA. 22 Scroll down. and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 24 In the Project Browser. 1-#3. enter 40A for the Trip value. click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. 19 With panel L-1 selected. 21 Under Electrical-Loads. under Instance Parameters. 1-#12. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. click Disconnect. 1-#8. on the Options Bar. select panel L-1. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100. and click Element Properties. 23 Click OK. and select T1 from Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. 1-#12. click the drop-down list on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. 100.

31 In the Mechanical/Electrical room. Size the service entrance conductors 35 In the Project Browser. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. but must be reconnected to the power circuits.27 Click OK. 30 In the Error dialog. select panel L-2. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. 37 Close the Warning. 34 Click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 29 In the Type Selector.00A. click . . 38 On the Options Bar. 36 With the MDP panel selected. 39 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. 32 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. under Electrical Loads. and on the Options Bar. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 28 In the 2-Power view. . Defining Circuit Loads | 279 . under Instance Parameters. The transformer is now rated at 30kVA. click Disconnect. in the Mechanical/Electrical room. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. select T2. select the T2 transformer. selectM_480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: M_30kVA. This completes the Electrical Tutorial. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads.

280 | Chapter 3 Electrical Systems .

you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. you will understand the process. You can search the Training Files ➤ Metric directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded.Plumbing Systems 4 In this tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. you can choose to save your work. As you create the plumbing system. go to http://www. methodology. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. By following this workflow. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial datasets are not present. including plumbing fixtures.autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. 281 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2008. and sanitary piping.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. hot and cold water piping.

Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 6 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. “Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems” on page 283. The selected component families are loaded into the project. planning is critical to a successful design. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend. Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: M_Toilet . click the Training Files icon. 3 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Wall Mounted Flush Valve and Wall Hung Urinal.rfa M_Wall Hung Urinal. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. are added under Families in the Project Browser. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa 11 Click Open. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. All of the loaded families. In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. 12 You can save the open file if you wish.rfa 5 Click Open.rfa M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Loading Plumbing Families. 282 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ M_Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems.

click Duplicate. under Mechanical. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 7 Rename the new pipe type. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: M_Standard For Transition. 2 Right-click PVC. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. and click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. PVC Sanitary Vent. and click Properties. select M_Pipe PVC Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. select M_Pipe PVC Bend: M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. and press Enter. select None For Cross. and click Properties. select M_Pipe Glued PVC Cross: Standard For Transition. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Mechanical. select M_Pipe PVC Coupling: M_Standard 10 You can save the open file if you wish. “Add Plumbing Fixtures” on page 284. select Tee For Tee. right-click PVC Sanitary.rvt. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Configuring Plumbing Pipe Systems. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 4 Right-click PVC Sanitary. select M_Pipe Glued Short Sanitary Tee: Standard For Tap. click the Training Files icon. 8 Right-click PVC Sanitary Vent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 283 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select Tee For Tee. enter PVC Sanitary for the new name. 1 In the Project Browser. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them. 3 Right-click PVC 2. select M_Pipe Vent Tee: M_Standard For Tap. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. select None For Cross. click Rename.Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise.

3 sinks. 5 On the Options Bar verify that (Place on Work Plane) is selected. and 3 sinks. click Plumbing Fixture. 3 urinals. Finally. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping. 3 wall-mounted urinals. The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. In this lesson. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room. and double-click 2 . 284 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 4 Select Floor-Mounted Flush Valve Water Closet : Standard in the Type Selector.Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Adding Plumbing Fixtures. ZR (Zoom Region). click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Plumbing to make it the active view. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room.rvt. You then modify the piping. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add 2 toilets.

and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 400 from the right wall. and when the preview of the urinal is 500 from the left wall. click Plumbing Fixture. and on the Options Bar. (Place on 10 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. verify that Vertical Face) is selected. and when the preview of the toilet is 160 from the upper wall and 460 from the right wall. click to place the toilet.6 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. click to place the toilet. 7 Move the cursor into the stall to the left. 9 Select Wall Hung Urinal : Standard in the Type Selector. Place wall-mounted urinals 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 285 . click to place the toilet.

and click to place the dimension annotation. and Individual 15 Click the centerline of the left wall. (Aligned) is selected. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. as shown and place a third urinal between the other 2 urinals. 14 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 286 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. and click to place the dimension annotation. 16 Move the cursor down. move the cursor up. You will use the Dimension tool to space them evenly along the wall. (The placement is not critical. 17 Using the same method. Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer.) 12 Click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. verify that References is selected for Pick. click the centerline of each urinal. and click.11 Place a second urinal near the wall of the leftmost toilet stall. 18 Working from left to right.

21 While pressing Ctrl. and in the Type Selector. The urinal is placed 500 from the wall of the toilet stall. click the value for the blue dimension. Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. click Plumbing Fixture. Place sinks 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select the counter top. and click the blue dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. and press Delete. 23 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). and for Plane. 26 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. select Pick. and click OK. (Equal Control) above the 20 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 287 . 25 In the drawing area. select Pick a plane. select Sink Single Island : Public. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. under Specify a new Work Plane. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation. and enter 500. 24 In the Work Plane dialog.19 Select the rightmost urinal. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog.

30 On the Design Bar. 29 Click Modify. specify the distance between the rightmost sink and the right wall as 560. and then delete the dimension annotations. 31 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and place a third sink between the other 2 sinks as shown. equalize the space between sinks. 28 Place a second sink near the right wall. click Dimension. (The placement is not critical.27 Place the sink 560 from the left wall and 460 from the lower wall. 288 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .

Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Starting the Sanitary Piping System. urinals. and click to place the floor drain. and floor drain. scroll down to View Range. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 34 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise. and for Plane. click the Training Files icon.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click 2 . select M_Round Floor Drain : 125. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. select Level : Level 2. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 289 .Plumbing to make it the active view.Place the floor drain 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and in the Type selector. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and click View Properties. 33 On the Options click (Place on Work Plane). you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. under Extents. “Begin Creating the Sanitary System ” on page 289. as shown. 35 Click Modify. click Plumbing Fixture. 36 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets.

expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click Main. click Branch. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. you can copy the sanitary outlet from this tutorial into your other projects. and click to place the sanitary outlet approximately as shown. 15 Click the title bar for the browser. specify Fine for Detail Level. 5 Click OK twice. 18 Zoom in on the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. select Sanitary from the System Type list. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. click Mechanical Equipment. 290 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . under Primary Range. The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. 20 Move the cursor over the chase. select Pipe Sanitary Outlet : Standard. 21 Click Modify. Click Window ➤ System Browser. and in the Type Selector. 16 Right-click in the system browser table. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. click View ➤ Piping. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols.4 In the View Range dialog. specify -300 11 In the left panel. and under View Depth. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. specify -300 13 Click OK. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. specify -1500 for Bottom Offset. NOTE If you do not find the sanitary outlet among any of the families included with Revit MEP. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 19 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. click Mechanical Settings. specify -1500 for Level Offset. 9 In the right panel. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. and select Sanitary from the System Type list.

(Select Equipment for System). 26 On the Options bar. and click Element Properties. as shown. Right-click the sanitary outlet in the view. click area. and floor drain. click (Create Sanitary System). 24 Zoom in on the men’s room. low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. 25 On the Options Bar. and click the sanitary outlet in the drawing Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 291 .The sanitary outlet is added to the Unassigned folder in the system browser. toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. The elevation will be specified as -1200. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. enter -1200 for Offset. 22 The elevation of the sanitary outlet with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. toilets.

and on the Design Bar.The sanitary outlet is added to Sanitary 1 in the System Browser and the sanitary piping system is previewed in the view. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. 28 Click Solutions. to view them. and use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment into the middle of the chase above the urinals. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). 30 Select solution 1 of 6. 292 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . enter 1. 29 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. as shown. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. 31 Select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal. click Layout Path. as needed.00 for Slope. 27 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. see Layout Paths. For more information on Layout Path solutions. click Modify.

Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 293 . and drag it into the chase. in line with the branch segment.32 Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. 33 Click Finish Solution.

select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. slope. as shown.34 Examine the piping that was automatically placed using the Layout Path tools. The second tab highlights the fixture. 294 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . checking for the proper connectivity. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. ■ ■ Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. Select each pipe segment in the system. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. The third tab should highlight the entire system. and check the slope control. and orientation of fittings: ■ Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When fittings are reversed.

37 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Show categories from all disciplines. and double-click 3D Plumbing.35 In the Project Browser. 36 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 38 Click OK. Enter the keyboard shortcut. specify Fine for Detail Level. 39 On the View Control Bar. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. VG (Visibility/Graphics). Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 295 .

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise.40 You can save the open file if you wish. adding the sinks in the men’s room. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.Plumbing to make it the active view. 296 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. and double-click 2 . Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Connecting Sink Drain Lines. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. “Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System” on page 296 to continue creating the sanitary system. click the Training Files icon.rvt. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning. click Options. Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 6 In the Layout Options dialog. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 297 . 8 Click Modify. If you select the pipe. and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard in the Type Selector. and press Enter. enter 1. click Pipe Fitting. and when the extension snap displays. right-click the connector on the open leg. 7 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall. enter 1000 for Slope Run. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.00 for Slope Angle. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. enter 3950. click to place the fitting. 10 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. press the Space Bar once. and click OK. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Options Bar.4 Select the tee. When you press the space bar. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector.

00 for Slope Angle.11 Select the fitting. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down toward the centerline of the wall below the sinks. and click Draw Pipe. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. and on the Options Bar. verify that the slope is specified as 1. and press Enter. and click OK. click to specify the end of the pipe. enter 50. click Pipe Fitting. 14 Using the method learned earlier. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 298 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 17 In the Layout Options dialog. and when the wall centerline snap displays. click to place the fitting. and when the extension snap displays. click the size for the wye leg. 15 Select the wye fitting. click Options. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard in the Type Selector. right click the connector on the open leg. highlight the wye. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 16 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector.

click Apply. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. click to specify the end of the pipe. and click Modify. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. the vertical pipe extends 150 above the level of the floor. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 299 . expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added.19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. enter 150 for Offset. In this case. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment.

enter 45. specify 200 for Offset. and on the Options Bar. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. 29 Click the connector snap on the right leg. The double wye is added to the vertical segment as shown above. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described in the previous exercise. click Pipe. 31 Drag the pipe to the right. 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. 24 On the Plumbing tab. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 27 Zoom in on the double wye. 300 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. 22 In the 3D view. and when Horizontal and Extension displays. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued Double DWV Wye : Standard. check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. 26 Select the double wye fitting. click Pipe Fitting.If necessary. 30 In the Layout Options dialog. This is best done by carefully following these steps. click to specify the end of the pipe. and click OK. 28 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 32 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click Options. press Space.00 for Slope Angle. and click to place the fitting.

42 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 301 . and click OK. 39 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. and when Horizontal and Extension displays.Plumbing. and on the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor over the center leg of the fitting. click Options. 38 Click Modify. click Pipe again. 46 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. click to specify the end of the pipe. and press Delete. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. 33 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. and select the leftmost sink.00 for Slope Angle is specified. specify 400 for Offset. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click Pipe again. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and another segment of pipe. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 34 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the double wye. 40 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 44 In the Project Browser. verify that 45. click the connector snap. and double-click 2 . 45 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. an elbow. and click Apply.This adds a short segment of pipe from the wye. 36 In the Layout Options dialog. 37 Drag the pipe to the left. and press Delete. 43 Click Modify.

select the 3 short segments of pipe connected to the double wye. drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. specify 40 mm for Size. specify 0.00 for Slope Angle. and use the same method to connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. and on the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 48 In the Layout Options dialog. 53 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. click Options. and on the Options Bar. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and click OK. double-click 3D Plumbing. 50 Click Modify. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 51 Select Pipe again. specify 450 for Offset. 49 On the Options Bar. 54 While pressing Ctrl.47 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. 52 In the Project Browser.

and click Finish to create piping for that solution. You use (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through the up to 6 proposed solutions. 59 Select solution 2 of 2. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. 57 Select solution 3 of 3. select the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 3 of 3. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 55 While pressing Ctrl. 63 On the Options Bar. Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. click Routing Solutions. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. 58 While pressing Ctrl. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 303 . and on the Options Bar. and select a proposed solution. click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. click Routing Solutions. 60 Using the same method. 61 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. 56 On the Options Bar.

00 for Slope. select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. When the piping was created for the sink drains. such that the arrow is pointing away from the double wye fitting. and click Finish System. and in the Type Selector. click (Pick Aligning Element) to toggle the reference end for the slope. click Add to System. there is a smaller movement. 71 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. You could have entered a negative value for slope and clicked to specify the end closest to the sink as the reference (with the arrow pointing toward the double wye). expand Sanitary ➤ M_Pipe Sanitary Outlet : M_Standard. and click Select. 66 In the System Browser. Now that the routing is completed. You can move fixtures by dragging. click (Edit System). select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. select all 3 sinks. and click Finish. you can change these to the more commonly used M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. modifying offset values. 68 On the Design Bar.64 Enter 1. 72 While pressing Ctrl. 65 Using the same method. 67 On the Options Bar. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke depends is proportional to the zoom level. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. right-click Sanitary 1. The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 70 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. 304 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify the slope for the piping for the remaining sinks. M_Pipe PVC Bend : M_Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions. When zoomed in close. The arrow points away from the reference end of the slope. you can make minor adjustments to the system. 69 One at a time.

otherwise. skip the next 2 steps. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 305 . (After the third tab. 76 You can save the open file if you wish. highlight the leftmost sink.) 75 If you want to save your work. 74 Using the method learned earlier. and select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard in the Type Selector. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. the entire system should be highlighted. click File menu ➤ Save As.73 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. 77 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

rvt. 4 Select the upper elbow. In the left pane of the Open dialog. while maintaining the same angle. select it and on the toolbar. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and select the horizontal pipe. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the endpoint for the move as shown. 6 Click on the sanitary outlet to specify a start point for the move as shown. adjusting the sanitary stack. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Waste Stack Connection.78 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Zoom in on the sanitary outlet. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. click the Training Files icon. 7 Drag the preview approximately 200 along the horizontal line away from the elbow. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click (Move). and press Delete. “Refining the Sanitary Stack” on page 306 to continue creating the sanitary system. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. 306 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .

Add a reducing wye to the stack 9 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). specify 150 for D (diameter). and select M_Pipe Glued Reducing DWV Wye : Standard. 10 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe. and click to place the fitting. and when the Extension snap displays. click Pipe Fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 307 .8 Select the elbow and vertical pipe segment. and on the Options Bar.

select the wye. 308 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Section. click the value for the 45 degree leg. and press Enter. and click piping. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 13 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. If necessary. enter 100 to change its size. and click Modify. The wye is added to the vertical segment. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet. to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward the sanitary 12 Select the wye. double-click 2 .11 Click Modify. 14 On the View tab on the Design Bar.

enter -750 for Offset. and select the reducing wye fitting. and click OK. click Pipe. double-click 3D . 17 Zoom in. click Options. 21 Click the connector on the 45 degree leg. 16 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 309 . and press Enter. parallel to the main segment of pipe from the toilets. specify Fine. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment.Plumbing. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.00 for Slope Angle. and click to specify the end of the pipe.15 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view. 23 Drag the pipe to the left and down. 22 In the Layout Options dialog. and when Vertical and Extension displays. for Detail Level. enter 45. and on the Options Bar.

24 Click Modify. click Routing Solutions. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. an elbow. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). 310 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . and press Delete. 27 Select solution 2 of 2. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 25 Select the elbow and horizontal pipe segment just added. and on the Options Bar. 26 While pressing Ctrl. and another segment of pipe. leaving only the short pipe segment connected to the wye.

32 Click Modify. and click the connector snap. 33 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. and click Apply. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 31 On the Options Bar. specify 1200 for Offset.28 Select the elbow created by the routing solution tool. 30 Move the cursor over the open leg of the reducing wye. and in the Type Selector select M_Pipe Glued DWV Bend : Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 311 . 29 On the Plumbing tab. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click Pipe.

Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Refining Urinal Waste Lines. use the Filter tool to select only piping. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click 2 . In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (If necessary. 312 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .36 Proceed to the next exercise. running it inside the wall. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. click the connector snap. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal.Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Training Files icon.) 3 Press Delete. “Refining the Urinal Lines” on page 312 to continue creating the plumbing system.rvt.

7 In the Layout Options dialog. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and move the cursor along the center line of the chase. Refining the Urinal Lines | 313 . then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 300. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. specify 1. 10 Drag the preview over the urinal drain. drag the preview to the left approximately 200. 12 In the Project Browser. specify 50 for D (diameter). 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. double-click 3D. 8 On the Options Bar. click Draw Pipe. press Tab until the Sanitary connection displays on the status bar at the bottom of the window. and click Options. and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal. click once to specify the end of the pipe. 11 Click Modify. enter 300 for Offset. 9 On the Options Bar. and when the snap displays.The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and click to specify the end of the pipe. starting at the level of the original pipe. to a point in line with the center of the leftmost urinal. 6 On the Options Bar.00 for Slope Angle.Plumbing to make it the active view.

21 Right-click the section of pipe that you just added. click Options. 18 In the Layout Options dialog. double-click 3D. and click Create Similar. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously. and click OK.Plumbing. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation properties of the existing pipe. drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the urinal. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. 22 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe and the centerline snap for the rightmost urinal. and zoom in on the urinals.13 Click the new pipe segments and check the slope. verify that the slope is specified as 1. 24 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 15 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 25 In the Project Browser. 314 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems .Plumbing to make it the active view. 17 Click to specify the start of the pipe. click Pipe. 20 Click Modify.00 for Slope Angle. 19 Drag the preview down to the sanitary connector on the middle urinal. and click to specify the end of the pipe at the sanitary drain connector. double-click 2. 16 Move the cursor over the intersection of the branch pipe above the middle urinal and the centerline snap for the urinal. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 23 Click to specify the start of the pipe. Connect the remaining urinals 14 In the Project Browser.

28 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. double-click 2 . So. Refining the Urinal Lines | 315 . However.Plumbing to make it the active view. specify 80 for D (diameter). 27 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 100 mm segment) as shown. you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. specify 80 for D (diameter). first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. Add a cleanout 29 Select the pipe between the 80 elbow and the left urinal.Resize pipes 26 In the Project Browser.

30 Select the elbow. and select M_Pipe PVC DVW Bend : Standard. Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. specify 50 for D. 32 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 36 Select the vertical pipe. select M_Pipe Glued Short Reducing Sanitary Tee : Standard. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. and in the Type Selector. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. and in the Type Selector. 35 In the Project Browser. click Pipe Fitting. click to place the plug on the tee. 33 Select the pipe to the urinal again. and on the Options Bar. 31 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Plumbing to make it the active view. and when the extension snap displays. select M_Pipe PVC Plug : M_Standard. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. Redefine fittings 34 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. 316 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow. double-click 3D.

37 Click Modify. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. 39 You can save the open file if you wish. Adding Vents to the System | 317 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. “Adding Vents to the System” on page 317 to continue creating the plumbing system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 38 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.

expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Click Apply. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphics dialog as described previously. Create additional vents 11 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. specify 50 for D (diameter). select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. and specify 2700 for Offset. click Pipe. 10 Click Modify. click the Training Files icon. click Options. click Pipe. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals. 6 On the Options Bar. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. NOTE You must move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. specify 0. If necessary. and in the Type Selector. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment.00 for Slope Angle. 318 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 7 In the Layout Options dialog.rvt.

as shown. Adding Vents to the System | 319 . place another vent between the two rightmost urinals. 15 Using the same method. 16 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping. and click Apply. 13 On the Options Bar. specify 2700 for Offset. use the Flip control to make the adjustment. click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. 14 Click Modify.12 On the Options Bar. specify 50 for D (diameter).

and click Draw Pipe. 24 Select the tee and click the plus symbol to its left to change the tee to a cross. 20 Select the elbow at the top of the middle vent pipe. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. click Pipe. right-click the connector at the open end. and in the Type Selector. 26 Drag the pipe preview a short distance. 22 Click the connector at the open leg of the tee to specify a starting point for the pipe.Connect the individual vents 17 Select the vertical vent between the 2 rightmost urinals. and click the + control above it to change the elbow to a tee. and click Modify. 21 On the Plumbing tab of the Design Bar. 320 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 23 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the end point. 19 Drag the pipe preview toward the middle vent. A short section of pipe is added to the tee. 18 Press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. click Draw Pipe. 25 Select the leftmost vent. click Apply. specify 3000 for Offset. and click the connector at the open end of the middle vent to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 27 Continue dragging the preview to the open connector on the tee at the upper end of the middle vent. An elbow is automatically placed at the joint. right click the connector. and press Space.

specify 50 for D (diameter). and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. 32 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Pipe. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. Adding Vents to the System | 321 . click Apply. specify 50 for D (diameter). Add a vent to the sinks 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. and on the Options Bar. and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 34 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink. and specify 2700 for Offset. 33 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye.28 Click Modify.

A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 39 You can save the open file if you wish.35 Click Modify. click Draw Pipe. 36 Select the vent. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. “Create the Cold Water System” on page 323 to continue creating the plumbing system. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 38 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. 40 Click File menu ➤ Close. 322 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 37 Drag the pipe preview. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. right-click the connector at the open end.

Create the Cold Water System | 323 . and in the right pane. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and in the right pane. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. specify None For Cross. expand Piping ➤ Conversion. click Rename. and press Enter. You now have the cold water piping at 2600 and the hot water piping at 2550. specify Tee For Tee. specify M_Pipe Elbow : M_Standard For Preferred Junction Type. 10 In the left pane. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. 11 In the left pane. specify M_Pipe Transition Eccentric: M_Standard For Union. specify M_Pipe Cross: M_Standard For Transition. and double-click 2 . in the right pane. specify M_Pipe Straight Coupling: M_Standard Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 2550 for Offset. 15 Press F9 to open the System Browser. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. click Branch. click the Training Files icon. enter Cold Water for the new name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 In the left panel. 12 In the table. click Branch. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Cold Water Piping. click Main. specify M_Pipe Tee: M_Standard For Tap. Create the cold water system 14 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. click Rename. click Mechanical Settings. which avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans.Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 4 Right-click Standard 3. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 2600 for Offset. click View ➤ Piping.Plumbing to make it the active view. 5 Right-click Cold Water. and click Properties. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow.rvt. and press Enter. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. in the right pane. 9 In the table. click Main. and click Duplicate. right-click Standard. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. 16 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. enter Hot Water for the new name. 2 Repeat the previous step to create another copy of Standard. 3 Right-click Standard 2.

324 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 30 Select the middle sink in the view. select Pipe Types : Cold Water. click (Connect Into). verify that the slope is specified as 0. click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). 23 On the Options Bar. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. specify 750 for Offset. and in the Type Selector. 26 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector. Create piping for the cold water system 21 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 22 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.17 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. and on the Options Bar click (Filter). and click to end the run as shown. and click OK. click Options. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. and on the Options Bar. click Check None. and click to specify the end the segment. 24 In the Layout Options dialog. click Pipe.00 for Slope Angle. 18 In the Filter dialog. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and click OK. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. select the domestic cold water connector. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 19 While pressing Shift. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. click the floor drain. then select Plumbing Fixtures.

36 Click Modify. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. 37 Zoom in on the area above the toilets.A segment of pipe is added connecting the sink to the cold water system. select the cold water pipe. 42 On the Options Bar. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. 33 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the 2 rightmost sinks. and click to end that segment. drag the preview to the center of the wall behind the sinks. 32 On the Plumbing tab. (If necessary. 35 On the Options Bar. click the snap on the cold water pipe. Create the Cold Water System | 325 . click Pipe. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 34 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. specify 2600 for Offset. and click Apply. click Pipe. 39 On the Plumbing tab. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room. 40 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe just above the wall. specify 600 for Offset.) 38 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. 41 Drag the preview to the left. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. click to specify the end of the pipe.

and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 44 In the Project Browser. 45 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. 46 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into).Plumbing. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 47 Select the elbow behind the toilet. 48 On the Plumbing tab.43 Click Modify. click Pipe. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. select the rightmost toilet. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the + control to change it to a tee. 326 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . double-click 3D.

53 Select the rightmost urinal. . and on the Options Bar click . and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. and click the vertical cold water pipe. and click the horizontal cold water pipe Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 51 Click Modify. 54 Use the same method to connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.49 Click the open connector on the tee. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 52 Select the leftmost toilet. 50 Drag the preview to the left. and on the Options Bar click that you added to the tee. and click to specify the endpoint behind the left toilet as shown. Create the Cold Water System | 327 .

but leaving the branch to the urinals as is). F8. 58 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. 328 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . specify 50 for D (diameter). feeding the toilets (including the tees. The final steps in this exercise will adjust the size of several sections of the piping. Adjust cold water pipe sizes 55 On the toolbar. 56 While pressing Shift. and then select the horizontal segments as shown. as shown.All of the cold water piping is in place. click (Dynamic Modify View) or enter the keyboard shortcut. drag the cursor to spin the 3D Plumbing view to allow selecting the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. 57 On the Options Bar.

64 You can save the open file if you wish. specify 20 for D (diameter). specify 40 for D (diameter). 63 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 60 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. 62 On the Options Bar. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 61 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink).59 On the Options Bar. Create the Cold Water System | 329 .

5 In the Filter dialog. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Plumbing Fixture. “Create the Hot Water System” on page 330. select M_Water Heater : 40Gallon. and click to place the water heater as shown. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. 2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 2 . 6 On the Options Bar.Plumbing. and on the Options Bar. Open Metric ➤ Plumbing ➤ m Creating Hot Water Piping. and in the Type Selector. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. click the Training Files icon. and zoom in on the sinks. create the hot water system. select Plumbing Fixtures. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click the title bar for the browser. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. click (Filter).rvt. 330 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click Check None. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 9 Expand Metric ➤ Plumbing. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left.rfa. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. and click View ➤ Piping. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). to the left of the main cold water pipe. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Double-click M_Water Heater.

expand Domestic Cold Water. click (Connect Into). select the water heater in the view. and on the Options Bar. select Connector 2 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 20. and click the main cold water pipe. 19 On the Edit System tab. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. and click Finish System. click Add to System. right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. expand Domestic Hot Water. and click Select. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. click Add to System. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Edit System). click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the water heater in the view. 16 On the Edit System tab. select the water heater in the view. and click Select. right-click the connector.14 In the System Browser. click (Edit System). 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. and click Finish System. The Edit System tab is activated on the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. Create the Hot Water System | 331 . and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. 17 In the System Browser.

select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 28 On the Plumbing tab. specify 800 for Offset. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and in the Type Selector.23 On the Plumbing tab. click Pipe. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. 26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. specify 2550 for Offset. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. and in the Type Selector. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 27 Click Modify. 332 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . click to specify the starting point for the pipe. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. click when the hot water connector displays. 30 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. click Pipe.

Plumbing. 36 Right-click the open connector. and click the hot In this case. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. 38 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. click water pipe below the sinks.31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. click Draw Pipe. and click to end that segment. and on the Options Bar. 33 Click Modify. (Connect Into). 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. specify 800 for Offset. 39 Click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. double-click 3D. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 40 In the Project Browser. click Apply. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 34 Select the middle sink in the view. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. and click to specify the end of the segment. Create the Hot Water System | 333 .

43 Click Modify. 334 | Chapter 4 Plumbing Systems . 46 You can save the open file if you wish. double-click 2 . 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems.41 On the Plumbing tab. 44 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and click. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.Plumbing. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click Pipe.

After finishing each exercise. you can choose to save your work. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. As you create the systems. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2008. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2008. methodology. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www.autodesk. At the end of this tutorial. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you design a wet and dry fire protection system for an office building. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. If the tutorial datasets are not present. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. By following the recommended workflow. 335 .Fire Protection Systems 5 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset.

you can then select that discipline or sub-discipline from the list. naming it 3D Fire Prot. 4 With the 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. click the Training Files icon.Ceiling Fire Prot. naming it 1 . and click View Properties. and finally. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. do the following: ■ ■ Create a level 1 floor plan view based on 1-Mech view. right-click in the drawing area.Fire Prot for Name. you create views and pipe types. TIP Working in different views for each discipline allows you to view only the system components for that discipline and makes system design more efficient. Notice that the 2 Fire Prot view is now relocated under Fire Protection. 6 Click OK. you modify the view properties. In this lesson. A new view called Copy of 2 . 3 Enter 2 . create schedules. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. Create new views 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 336 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .Fire Prot. under Graphics. and create a new ceiling plan view based on the 2 . you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building.Designing Fire Protection Systems Designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. For Sub-Discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. naming it 2 .Mech. Next.Fire Prot view active. Then. and click OK.Ceiling Mech view. You create views and pipe types. do the following: ■ ■ For Discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. and create a new 3D view based on the 3D HVAC view. This new sub-discipline creates a Fire Protection view category in the Project Browser. This view is based on the 2 Mech view properties. right-click Copy of 2 . TIP After you enter a discipline or sub-discipline for the first time. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. verify that Mechanical is selected. and size and tag the pipes.Mech is created and becomes the active view. 7 Using the method that you just learned. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. enter Fire Protection. right-click the view named 2 . manually modify the pipes and fittings. You will also draw the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. and click Rename. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers. During the fire protection design process. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. Open the m Starting the Fire Protection Project.Mech. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. insert fittings.

the command in progress terminates. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 8 In the Project Browser. enter Fire Protection Wet. click Modify. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 19 On the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. click Mechanical Settings. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. 10 In the Type Selector. Next. TIP When you click Modify. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 337 . and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. under Mechanical. right-click a pipe type and use the context menu. NOTE You can also create. right-click the Design Bar. Next. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. including the new material property. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you modify the pipe type properties. Next. double-click the HVAC listing to collapse it because you will no longer use those views in this lesson. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 For System Type. and click OK. 16 With the Type Properties dialog open. you create a pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. modify. for Material. select Carbon Steel. You can also press Esc. and click OK.Remember to specify Fire Protection for sub-discipline so that all views will be listed under Fire Protection in the Project Browser. Configure pipe conversion settings 20 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. 14 For Name. or verify pipe types from the Project Browser. 17 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. 18 In the Type Selector. Create new pipe types 9 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). 15 In the Type Properties dialog. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click Fire Protection. you create 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry systems. 23 Under System Type. click Pipe. click Duplicate. Next. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet.

structural beams. select Branch. TIP If a view does not contain room tags. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 24 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. you can easily identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component (indicated by 2 diagonal intersecting lines). and sketch a zoom region around Stairwell 30 (located in the lower-right corner of the building). do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. So. refer to Help. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 27 Click OK. verify that 2750 is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above the referenced level for the views. 338 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. Draw the supply pipe 28 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 25 For System Type. Notice that the cursor changes to a magnifying glass indicating that the Zoom tool is active. duct. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 26 Under System Type. For Offset.Fire Prot floor plan view to make it active. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 29 Enter ZR. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views that you will be designing in. verify that 2750 is specified. double-click the 1 . select Fire Protection Wet. The room name and number display in a tooltip and on the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar).■ For Offset. For more information. Next. you begin the design by drawing the supply pipe for the fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are mechanical settings that are used when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. or architecture.

The new pipe displays.30 On the View toolbar. for Offset. do the following: ■ ■ For D. 32 In the Type Selector. and click Apply to specify the pipe end point. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 31 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Pipe. enter 0. select 150 mm. You will need to reactivate it. and click in the approximate area to specify the pipe start point. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can press Tab after specifying the Offset to confirm the value. if you reopen Revit MEP. For Offset. click (Thin Lines) to display the geometry in thin lines. enter 6400. Thin Lines allows you to view the true thickness of lines relative to the zoom of the view. This line thickness is used for plotting purposes giving the effect of line weights. 33 On the Options Bar. NOTE The Thin Lines display is not saved during your design session. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 339 . 34 Place the cursor in the lower-left corner of the stairwell.

Then. As you place the sprinklers. You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. you created new views and modified view properties. 39 In the Dynamic View dialog. and Shading w/ Edges for Model Graphics Style. 340 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you verify the pipe geometry in the 3D view. select Fine for Detail Level. double-click the 3D Fire Prot view. click (Dynamically Modify View). click File menu ➤ Save. you drew the supply pipe for fire protection systems. IMPORTANT After finishing each exercise. and press Tab. Notice that the supply pipe extends from the floor in level 1 into level 2.TIP When entering a value. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. you place the sprinklers. use the Zoom. using this information. you can enter 2600 and press Tab for 2600 mm. First. 40 If you want to save your work. you create a schedule to identify the required number of sprinklers per room. However. 38 On the View toolbar. and Spin buttons to verify that the supply pipe geometry is as you expected. Finally. just enter the value. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset provided. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the rooms. Next. and click Save. 36 In the Project Browser. Scroll. The pipe geometry displays in 2 line and shaded allowing you to better see it. 41 In the Save As dialog. In the next exercise. For example. you place the wet system sprinklers and create a schedule. you do not need to type measurement symbols. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter Starting the Fire Protection Project Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. you can choose to save your work. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. In this exercise. 37 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left of the drawing area).

Create a calculated value parameter 7 Click Calculated Value. Open the m Placing Sprinklers. select it. 8 In the Calculated Value dialog. For Discipline. do the following: ■ Under Category. and click Add. 6 Select a field. under Available fields. verify that Number is selected. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required per room. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. Sprinklers. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 12. select Rooms. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 341 .Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. To remove a field. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 5 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. enter Min. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. click the Training Files icon. For Type. and click Remove. 4 While pressing Ctrl. verify that Common is selected. For Formula.1. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Area. enter Area/12.1 square meters. Click OK. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. Verify that Formula is selected.

A new view called Room Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. verify that (none) is selected. select Number. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine which rooms meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. The Min. select Min. Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Verify that equals is selected. click Field Format. Verify that Ascending is selected. Next. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. including spaces.NOTE You must enter the formula verbatim. select Level. For Rounding. and sketch a zoom region around Office 6 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per room data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. Although you rounded the data to one decimal place. Place a sprinkler 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2. Sprinklers. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Organize the data 10 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). For Field formatting. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. For And. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. sorted according to room number. Under Level. 15 Enter ZR. select 2 decimal places. select Fixed. select Level 2. 9 Click OK. verify that (none) is selected. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project as if you had used the Element Properties dialog. For Units. For Then by. Click OK twice. 11 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. Notice that only the data for the level 2 rooms displays. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. You can change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 342 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 rooms. 13 In the Format dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by.

17 In the Work Plane dialog. 18 Click OK. click to specify the line end point. you draw 2 reference lines to help you accurately place the sprinklers in the center of the ceiling tiles. under Specify a new Work Plane. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In the Type Selector. click to specify the line start point. ■ Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 343 . This specifies Level 2 as the work plane for the reference lines. 16 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Chain and Radius are cleared.Next. and after the intersection snap displays. and specify Level : Level 2. click Lines. and after the intersection snap displays. verify that Level : Level 2 is selected. For Plane. 19 On the Options Bar. verify that Lines is selected. click Name. 20 Place the cursor at the ceiling grid intersection as shown. 21 Draw the line diagonally to the opposite grid intersection.

However. for Underlay. 344 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The line displays. right-click in the drawing area. draw a second diagonal line that intersects the first at the center of the ceiling tile. and click View Properties. select Level 2. under Graphics. 22 With the Lines tool active. a warning displays indicating that the line is not visible in the ceiling plan view. 24 Click OK. Notice that the Lines tool remains active. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You need to specify an underlay for this view to display the reference lines.The line is created. 25 Using the same method.

click Sprinkler. 30 On the Options Bar. you place a sprinkler. Next. and after the mid point snap displays.26 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Line tool. 28 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. click to place the sprinkler. place the cursor over the intersection of the 2 lines. select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 345 . 31 With the view zoomed. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 Zoom in on the lines to verify them.

34 Right-click in the drawing area. you delete the reference lines. Next. This removes the Level 2 underlay from the ceiling plan view. 37 On the Edit toolbar. you delete the reference lines. The sprinkler is centered in the ceiling tile. and click OK. select None. for Underlay. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement in the ceiling tiles. The underlay was used only to display the reference lines. You use this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. The selected sprinkler displays in red. 33 While pressing CTRL. select the sprinkler that you placed. Continue placing sprinklers 36 In the drawing area. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. you continue placing sprinklers. Next. and click View Properties. 346 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .32 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and then press Delete. NOTE When placing sprinklers. click both reference lines. click (Copy). under Graphics. Next.

Notice that the copy selection border follows the cursor. and that Copy is selected. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). click to specify the copy start point. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 347 . 41 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown.Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 38 On the Options Bar. 39 Zoom out so that the entire Office 6 ceiling grid is visible. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point. click to specify the copy end point. and after the intersection snap displays. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process. and after the intersection snap displays. and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. 40 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid.

place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. and select Multiple. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). and after the intersection snap displays. Copy and array sprinklers 42 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 44 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 6. and sketch a zoom region around Office 7 (located immediately below Office 6). verify that Copy is selected. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 7.TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. click to specify the copy start point. This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 46 On the Options Bar. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. 348 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Next. 47 In Office 6. 43 Enter ZR. 45 On the Edit toolbar. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. click (Copy).

48 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 7. specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 349 .

specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.49 Move the cursor directly down. 350 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 7. 51 While pressing CTRL. 50 On the Design Bar. creating an array is a 2-step process. 53 On the Options Bar. Furthermore. you array the other Office 7 sprinklers. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Move To. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). it is an ideal situation to use an array.The sprinklers are placed. then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). because all of the sprinklers in Office 7 are equally spaced. Next. click (Array). A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. to specify array end point. 52 On the Edit toolbar. You first specify an array start point. select Last. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. Verify that Constrain is cleared. click Modify. NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 351 .

54 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 7 sprinkler. 352 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. Notice that an outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the array end point as shown. click to specify the array start point. 55 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 353 . you place sprinklers in Office 8. Next. 56 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window.The Office 7 sprinklers are placed.

Notice that all elements in the 2 . click Check None. and click OK. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. and draw a pick box around Office 6. 58 On the Options Bar. drag the cursor to the lower-right. select Sprinklers.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.57 Starting outside the upper-left corner of the building. 59 In the Filter dialog. 354 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .

IMPORTANT When selecting components either by drawing a pick box (drag left to right). by cross-picking (drag right to left). you are selecting all components that are visible in the active view (within the view range). adjust the view so that you can see both Office 6 and Office 8. clear Multiple. 60 On the Edit toolbar. 63 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border.The Office 6 sprinklers are selected. you can clear it by filtering. or by pressing SHIFT and selecting the component. 62 Using the mouse scroll wheel. If the selection contains an unwanted component. or by selecting individual components. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 355 . click to specify the copy start point. click (Copy). and after the mid point snap displays. 61 On the Options Bar.

enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. 356 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. click to specify the copy end point. and after the mid point snap displays.64 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 8.

Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 357 . Next. 68 On the Options Bar. Remember to watch for the intersection snap. click (Copy). Create multiple sprinkler arrays 65 Zoom to show Office 8 and the part of the adjacent common area. 66 Select the lower-right Office 8 sprinkler. Open 2. 70 Move the cursor to the right into Open 2 as shown.You have now placed the sprinklers for the 3 offices. you place sprinklers in the large common space. You copy this sprinkler to Open 2 and use it to create a sprinkler array. click to specify the copy end point at the ceiling grid intersection. 67 On the Edit toolbar. verify that Multiple is cleared. and after the intersection snap displays. 69 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. Open 2.

74 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point. enter 6 for the number of arrays. 358 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 2. Next. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Number. Verify that Constrain is cleared. 71 Select the sprinkler that you copied.The Office 8 sprinkler is copied to Open 2. 72 On the Edit toolbar. click (Array). 73 On the Options Bar. You could copy sprinklers. For Move To. select 2nd. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. but creating an array is quicker.

76 While pressing CTRL. This is because 2nd was selected for Move To on the Options Bar. The array is created. Zoom out to display the array. refer to Help. If you make a mistake placing the array. Next. Notice that 4 arrays were created after the end point. select all Open 2 sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler. undo the step and try again. This indicated that the specified end point would be the placement location for the second array. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates.75 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 359 . click to specify the array end point as shown. you create multiple arrays based on this array. For more information about arrays. and after the intersection snap displays. IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately.

Verify that Constrain is cleared. 360 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 80 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. 79 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler that is within the array selection.If you need to remove an object from a selection. click (Array). and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify end point for the second array. select the object to remove while pressing SHIFT. do the following: Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Move To. For Number. enter 4 for number of arrays. 78 On the Options Bar. 77 On the Edit toolbar. verify that 2nd is selected.

click Edit Family on the Options Bar. 81 In the Revit MEP 2008 dialog. To modify a family type.The arrays are created. 84 Open the M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors.rfa file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder. Because this room does not have a ceiling. first. click Delete Element(s) to delete the 3 sprinklers. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes. Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. 83 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). you need to load them in the project. However. Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 361 . select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. The sprinkler family loads into the project. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. click the Training Files icon. Load a new sprinkler family 82 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. you place sprinklers in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 2 is complete Next. you will use non-hosted sprinklers.

select both sprinklers. This specifies the elevation for the selected sprinklers.Ceiling Fire Prot.Place non-hosted sprinklers 85 With the 2-Ceiling Fire Prot view active. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). 94 In the Element Properties dialog. This occurred because the sprinkler offset elevations are beyond the view range of the active ceiling view. double-click 2 . select M_Sprinkler-Upright-Non_Hosted : 15mm Upright. You address this warning after placing the other sprinkler. You can also use the Mirror tool to place the left sprinkler by drawing a mirror axis at the mid point of the top and bottom walls of the Mechanical/Electrical room. for Offset. you change the sprinkler offsets. and click OK. and double-click 2 . move the cursor toward the right wall. and click Element Properties from the context menu. under Constraints. A warning may display informing you that the sprinkler is not visible in the ceiling plan view. You can also right-click. Notice that the Mechanical/Electrical room sprinklers do not display. 88 In the Mechanical/Electrical 24 room. 91 In the Project Browser. click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the right wall. enter 2900 mm. and notice that the temporary dimensions reference the right wall. 92 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical room. 95 In the Project Browser. click Sprinkler.Fire Prot to make it the active view. enter ZR. click (Properties). 93 On the Options Bar. and notice that the sprinklers display in the Mechanical/Electrical room. 362 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and using the listening dimensions for reference. 89 Move the cursor near the left wall. Next. and while pressing CTRL. 90 Press the Spacebar to change the listening dimension reference to the left wall. 87 In the Type Selector. and click to place a sprinkler 1200 mm from the center of the left wall. 86 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.

■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. enter Placing Sprinklers Training for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. 97 If you want to save your work. 98 In the Save As dialog.Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 96 Using the placement methods that you have learned. and click Save. complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. Remember to always round decimals up to the next whole number. Remember to click to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Use sprinkler type: M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Pendent for all rooms. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement. you created a room schedule to calculate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each room based on the building specifications and the fire protection code. You placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement Creating Schedules and Placing Sprinklers | 363 . click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. after you placed the sprinklers. However. Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. During this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. and physically with piping. 364 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and expand the Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Thus. it would be considered empty. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. then press F9. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. sprinklers. and double-click 2 . You assign a system component (such as mechanical equipment. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. click System Browser. and use the System Browser to confirm your systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Fire Protection Wet system category located in the Unassigned folder. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. a Default system category would not contain any system components. In the next exercise. you create a system and piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Open the m Connecting Sprinklers. If the System Browser does not respond. Empty Default system categories do not display in the System Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. All system components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. click the Training Files icon. click in the drawing area to make it active. Unlike logical connections (systems). you then create pipes to physically connect the system components (piping is not considered a system).rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you also convert and place pipe fittings. modify pipe branches. if all system components are assigned. So.methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. As you assign sprinklers to systems.Fire Prot to make it the active view. After creating the logical connection. the assigned sprinklers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.

Notice that all elements within the 2 . select Sprinklers. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. and click OK. Connecting the Sprinklers | 365 . click Check None.Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 8 and Office 28. 7 In the Filter box. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable.Ceiling Fire Prot view range are selected.

All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. and will be considered empty.All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected and display in red. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Notice that the Default Fire Protection Wet system category no longer contains these sprinklers because you have assigned them to a system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. the default system category will not contain any sprinklers. 8 On the Options Bar. Note that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. the system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. Notice that after you click . IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Wet 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 366 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . After you assign the remaining sprinklers.

14 On the Options Bar. ■ You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys. Connect the sprinklers with piping 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and click Select. you can a system component to access the Layout Path on the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. and select solution 2. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. Next. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and select the system. You want the Network layout solution because it connects the sprinklers to a central main. Remember that systems can be created before or after creating pipe is drawn. 13 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and click Select to select the system. press Tab. verify that Solutions is selected. expand Piping. NOTE You do not need to select a system or have system components connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. After placing a system component. The Layout Path tools are provided on the Design Bar and Options Bar. Click (Next Solution). and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. The main will connect to the supply pipe in the stairwell. You can also right-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 listing in the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. This listing represent the system that you just created. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Connecting the Sprinklers | 367 . right-click Fire Protection Wet.

This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 20 Click OK. 19 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. You now modify the vertical main layout that will be the main pipe. you modify the layout path. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Modify. structural beams. A drag control displays. 18 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that 2750. Next. verify that Main is selected. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 23 Select the vertical layout path segment. or architecture. select Branch.Next. For Offset. 17 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. Modify the layout path 21 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. 22 Zoom in on the vertical main. duct. 15 On the Options Bar. You use pipe conversion settings to convert the layout path to physical piping. 368 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.0 is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 369 . drag the main to the left as shown.24 Using the drag control. 25 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout.

This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. select a different layout solution. Next. and are not part of the system. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 370 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Always check pipe connectivity after modification. Notice that all of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. 27 Enter VG. or manually modify the pipe. double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view. You can delete pipes and pipe fittings. This is because they constitute a physical rather than a logical connection. You hide these elements to allow you to easily snap to the sprinklers and the pipe. Notice that the cursor snaps to various building elements in the 3D view. Modify the pipe runs 26 In the Project Browser.The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or that offset elevations are incorrect. under Fire Protection ➤ 3D Views. Either relocate the system components. you modify the pipe run to consolidate the branch lines and simplify the design. and the system remains. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser.

clear Casework. 31 With the pipe and sprinkler selected. 29 Click OK. Ceilings. Roofs. Rooms. and click to select them. press TAB to highlight the branch pipe and sprinkler. Stairs. Railings. 30 Zoom in and place the cursor over the branch pipe that services the Office 8 sprinkler. The building elements are hidden. and after it highlights. do the following: ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. enter ZR. Floors. and draw a zoom region around the Office 8 sprinkler. and Windows. Under Visibility. The selected pipe and sprinkler display in red.28 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. Lines. Connecting the Sprinklers | 371 . Walls. Doors.

The Office 8 sprinkler is shown circled). the logical (system) connection is still intact. and draw a zoom region around the Open 2 sprinkler (located to the lower-right of the Office 8 sprinkler. 34 Enter ZF. Remember that although the physical (pipe) connection to the sprinkler has been deleted. to zoom out the view to fit the window. select the sprinkler to remove it from the selection. 33 Press Delete to delete the selected elements. 372 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .32 While pressing SHIFT. 35 Enter ZR.

you convert the elbow fitting at the end of the branch in order to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to it. Notice that 2 plus signs display. 37 Click the plus sign on the right. You may need to zoom in closer to better see the fitting conversion controls. These are fitting conversion controls which allow you to convert the elbow fitting to a tee fitting in either a vertical or horizontal orientation.Next. Fitting control locations indicate the orientation of the fitting connection. Connecting the Sprinklers | 373 . These controls convert the fitting to the next possible fitting type for the piping context. Convert a fitting 36 Select the elbow fitting at the end of the branch above the sprinkler. IMPORTANT Fitting conversion controls display as plus or minus signs that are located near a selected pipe fitting.

38 Select the tee fitting. A minus sign displays.The elbow converts to a tee with a vertical orientation. 374 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This fitting conversion control allows you to return to the previous fitting.

39 Click the minus sign to convert the tee back to the elbow fitting. a tooltip displays indicating the next possible fitting.TIP If you place the cursor over a fitting conversion control. Connecting the Sprinklers | 375 . and click the left plus sign. 40 Select the elbow fitting.

you draw the pipe to connect the Office 8 sprinkler to the branch. use the connector snap. . 42 Place the cursor over the open end of the tee fitting. to quickly and accurately locate a connector. . a tooltip appears confirming the connector.The elbow converts to a tee with a horizontal orientation. When drawing pipe. if a connector snap does not display. click Pipe. use the end point snap. zoom out the view so that the tee fitting and the Office 8 sprinkler are visible. If you pause briefly. or equipments. pipe fittings. When connecting pipe to some elements. click to specify the pipe start point. and after the end point snap displays. Notice that the pipe diameter is larger than the existing pipe. Next. such as pipe fittings and equipment in a 3D view. 43 Using the mouse scroll wheel. Connect the Office 8 sprinkler 41 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to pipe. 376 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 44 Begin to draw the pipe diagonally to the upper-left pipe along the same axis as the existing pipe and toward the Office 8 sprinkler.

45 Press the Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and offset values to those of the tee fitting. 46 In the Type Selector. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You should always verify the pipe type from the Type Selector on the Options Bar. TIP When drawing pipe. press the Spacebar after you specify the start point and move the cursor to begin drawing pipe. This automatically sets the pipe diameter or width and height. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing pipe. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected. enter 300 and press Enter to specify the length of the pipe segment. 47 Continue to draw the pipe. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the pipe type. Connecting the Sprinklers | 377 . and as the listening dimensions display. and the offset parameter to match those of the selected connector.

The pipe segment is created. 48 Click Modify on the Design Bar. Check connectivity and validate geometry 51 In the 3D view. and select the pipe segment that you just drew. and after the pipe segment highlights. Notice that all pipe fittings are automatically added. 49 Select the Office 8 sprinkler. Next. place the cursor over the pipe branch that you modified. press Tab 3 times. 50 On the Options Bar. you check the connectivity of the pipe branch to make certain everything is connected and validate the pipe geometry. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. 378 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . click (Connect Into).

The first time you press Tab. indicating that they are physically connected. If the entire network does not highlight. you can check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. 53 In the 3D Fire Prot view. then you know that a disconnect exists. you can click to select them. Connecting the Sprinklers | 379 . and after the objects highlight. Next. and equipment. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. 52 Using the same method. zoom in on the pipe and fittings. The lower section of the pipe run displays in red.The pipe branch including the sprinklers and the pipe fittings highlight. you validate the piping geometry. allowing you to better see the connections. check the connectivity in the 2 -Fire Prot floor plan view. IMPORTANT Understanding TAB behavior is very important when designing piping systems in Revit MEP. click to select them. Typically a disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make a connection. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. press TAB the required number of times. or you can use the Trim (Extend) tool. When pipes and fittings are connected. To use the TAB behavior for selecting highlighted objects. fittings. After the pipe run and sprinklers highlight. and verify that the physical pipe geometry is as expected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment.

and click OK. 56 On the Options Bar. clear Sprinklers. double-click 2 . right-click. under Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. click .Continue pipe branch modification 54 In the Project Browser. and after it highlights. 57 In the Filter dialog. 380 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 55 Zoom the view and draw a pick box (drag left to right) around the upper-right pipe branch (include fittings and sprinkler) that services Office 28. The pipe branch and fittings are deleted. This clears the Office 28 sprinkler from the selection. and click Delete. 58 Place the cursor over the selected pipe run.Fire Prot to make it the active view.

63 On the Options Bar. 64 In the Filter dialog. 60 Click to select the branch. 61 With the branch selected. and after it highlights. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. including the pipe fittings and lower Office 29 sprinklers. click . including the pipe fittings and the upper 2 Office 29 sprinklers. place the cursor over the lower-left Office 29 sprinkler. clear Sprinklers. select the highlighted pipe branch. Both selected branches display in red. and after it highlights. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe branch. 62 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. Connecting the Sprinklers | 381 .59 Place the cursor over the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler.

Next. 382 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 65 Press Delete to delete the 2 pipe branches including the pipe fittings. 67 On the Options Bar. Next. clear Sprinklers. 68 In the Filter dialog. Notice that only the pipes and pipe fittings are selected. and click OK. you need to delete the pipes connected to the upper-right Open 2 sprinklers. 69 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings. you draw pipe to connect a sprinkler. 66 Draw a pick box around the 2 upper-right sprinklers in Open 2.This clears the Office 29 sprinklers from the selection. click .

select the upper-right pipe branch to display the pipe segment connector. and after the connector snap displays over the sprinkler. 74 Draw the pipe down toward the sprinkler. and draw the pipe to the right toward the upper-right Office 29 sprinkler. All other pipe properties match those of the selected connector. 75 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is selected in the Type Selector. Connecting the Sprinklers | 383 . and after the centerline snap displays. 71 Right-click the connector located on the right end of the pipe. and click Draw Pipe.70 In Open 2. 72 In the Type Selector. click to specify the first pipe segment end point. 73 Zoom the view. click to connect to the sprinkler.

78 Using the same method. The Office 28 and Office 29 sprinklers are connected to the branch. The sprinkler connects into the pipe and all pipe fittings are automatically added. click (Connect Into). and select the pipe segment that you just drew. Next. and press TAB twice. connect the upper-left Office 29 sprinkler. 77 On the Options Bar. Next. 79 Place the cursor over the horizontal pipe branch. you check connectivity. 76 Select the lower Office 28 sprinkler (located above Office 29). you connect 2 more office sprinklers to the branch. 384 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems .The upper-right Office 29 sprinkler is connected.

notice that the 2 sprinklers in Open 2 do not highlight.The entire pipe branch highlights. Modify the pipe main 83 Place the cursor over the branch that services the lower Office 29 sprinklers. connect the 2 lower Office 29 sprinklers to the pipe branch located on the left. However. Connecting the Sprinklers | 385 . Remember to delete the end pipe segment before drawing pipe. and after it highlights. 82 Using the pipe branch modification methods that you learned. including sprinklers and pipe fittings. These sprinklers are not physically connected. you make additional pipe modifications. press TAB twice. 81 Check connectivity. This indicates that the branch and office sprinklers are connected. The branch including the Open 2 and office sprinklers highlight indicating that they are physically connected. and then click to select the highlighted objects. 80 Use to connect each of the Open 2 sprinklers to the branch. You need to connect these sprinklers. Next.

86 Drag the lower pipe connector down over the end of the lower pipe segment. This indicates 2 disconnects. release the mouse button to connect the 2 pipe segments. You need to resolve the disconnects. These branches were deleted during branch consolidation. branch. the connection continues to display for easy reference. If you move the cursor. and draw a zoom region around both disconnects. The highlighted objects display in red. making them easier to view. and after the connector snap displays. Notice that the highlighting stops at 2 areas along the main pipe. TIP After using TAB to check connectivity. 85 Select the upper pipe segment to display the 2 pipe connectors. 84 Enter ZR. 386 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and sprinklers display in red. you can click to select all highlighted objects.The connected main. These disconnects resulted from deleting the 2 tee fittings that connected the branches to the main.

90 Select the pipe segment below the disconnect as the extend end point. Trim/Extend is especially useful in modifying pipe and duct. 88 On the Options Bar. you use the Trim tool to resolve the disconnect. select the object as the trim/extend start point. click (Trim/Extend). Instead of dragging the pipe connector. You can also enter TR to activate the Trim/Extend tool. 89 Select the pipe segment above the disconnect as the extend start point. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that the Trim/Extend tool is active. 87 Zoom in on the lower disconnect.TIP When dragging a pipe connector. Connecting the Sprinklers | 387 . or in resolving disconnects. then select the object as the trim/extend end point. use TAB to check connectivity after making any modifications to pipe. First. As always. NOTE Trim/Extend is a 2-click process. notice that cursor changes to a pencil indicating that the Draw tool is active.

Next. indicating that they are connected. 92 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. 388 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . 93 Check connectivity. The main and branches highlight. 91 Click Modify on the Design Bar. you tile 2 views and modify the lower end of the pipe run.The 2 pipe segments connect.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. and draw a zoom region around the elbow fitting at the lower end of the main. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make it the active view.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 98 Enter WT to tile both windows. Connecting the Sprinklers | 389 . 97 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan : 2 .Fire Prot view active. enter ZR. 99 Adjust the view in both windows to view the elbow fitting and the left sprinkler as shown. 95 With the 2 . Next.Work in 2 views simultaneously 94 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. Notice that all pipe fittings display in their symbolic representation when you are viewing pipes in coarse or medium (single line) Detail Level. you tile 2 views to work in them simultaneously. the active view is the only open window. TIP When you tile 2 views. 96 In the Project Browser. including the sprinkler to the right. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Note that if this option is unavailable. You will work in the floor plan view and validate the geometry in the 3D view. the active view is tiled to the left.

If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. 104 Zoom in on the tee. 101 On the View Control Bar located at the lower left of the drawing area. click Pipe Fitting. you place an endcap on the tee. and after the mid point snap displays. click to place the endcap. Next. First. select the elbow. it is important to remember that the fitting connectors are located in the actual location of the fitting and not in the end of the symbolic representation. select Fine for Detail Level.Fire Prot view. 102 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. especially when symbolic fittings are displayed. When snapping to fittings in single line Detail Level. 100 In the 2 . select M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. and using the fitting conversion method that you learned earlier. 390 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The pipe geometry displays in 2 line. 105 Move the cursor over the end of the open end of the tee fitting. you change the view detail level to display pipes in 2 line. This symbolic representation is exaggerated and is larger than the actual fitting size. You should always zoom in on the fitting when working with a fitting. all pipe fittings display in their symbolic form. convert the elbow to a tee with a vertical orientation. you can change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe or turn off component visibility or filter objects in the Visibility Graphics dialog.NOTE When you are viewing pipes in single line display (coarse or medium Detail Level). Changing the Detail Level to Fine (2 line) will display the fittings in their actual size. This endcap will provide pipeline cleanout access. Remember to zoom the view to better see the fitting conversion controls. 103 In the Type Selector.

106 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 108 In the 3D Fire Prot view. press TAB once. and after it highlights. The endcap and tee fittings highlight indicating that they are connected. Connecting the Sprinklers | 391 . validate the endcap geometry. 107 Place the cursor over the endcap.

111 In the 3D Fire Prot view.Fire Prot view. The sprinkler. 110 Adjust the floor plan and 3D views to view the sprinkler that is located to the right of the tee and endcap. The pipes and fittings display in single line. You can also select the sprinkler while pressing SHIFT to clear it from the selection. this tee fitting endcap is connected to the tee connector. use the View Control Bar to change the view detail level to Medium. As stated earlier in this exercise. 113 In the Filter dialog. click . and pipe fittings display in red. all fittings and other elements are represented in their symbolic form. However. pipe. So. draw a pick box around the sprinkler and the connecting pipe branch. 112 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 114 Press Delete to delete the pipes and pipe fittings.109 In the 2 . their connectors are located in their actual location. in single line display. Next. Notice that the endcap displays as centered in the tee fitting. clear Sprinklers. 392 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you modify the sprinkler branch connection.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 393 . and select the right pipe segment above the sprinkler.Fire Prot view. You need to resolve the disconnect. 117 In the 2 . 118 Drag the right pipe segment connector to the right. 116 On the Options Bar.115 Select the sprinkler. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. click . zoom in and select the left pipe segment. release the mouse button to reconnect the pipe branch. and after the connector snap displays.

394 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . You can validate the geometry in the 3D view. The dry fire protection system will service the server room.Note that the end of the right pipe segment (and its connector) might be located in the symbolic fitting. You will check connectivity later in this exercise. you remove the pipe above Server Room 32. Next. zoom out and locate the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32 (located to the left of Conference Room 31). and press Delete. Remove a pipe segment 119 In the 2 . 120 Select the pipe segment that is above Server Room 32. You need to remove this pipe segment to follow good design practice. However. Watch for the end point snap as you drag the pipe segment. You can also snap to the end point of the tee fitting to connect the pipe. notice that the wet pipe segment is located over this room.Fire Prot view. You resolved the disconnect.

Connecting the Sprinklers | 395 . 122 Using the conversion methods that you learned. you need to convert a sprinkler tee fitting to an elbow in order to close the pipe connection. convert the tee to an elbow. Remember to zoom the view to locate the fitting conversion control. and draw a zoom region around the sprinkler that you recently modified. and check connectivity. This closes the left pipe segment end. Next.You will reconnect the Conference Room 31 sprinklers when you later finish this pipe run. 121 Enter ZR. 123 Zoom out. You will close the right end when you finish modifying the lower section of the wet system pipe run.

396 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Finish modifying the lower section of the pipe run 125 Using the methods that you learned. 124 In the 3D view. validate the pipe geometry. Next.Notice that the lower conference room sprinklers are not connected. you connect the lower conference room sprinklers. finish consolidating the branches that service Conference Room 31 (located at the lower-right corner of the building) as shown. You connect these after you validate the pipe geometry.

You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 131 On the Options Bar. and then you create piping to physically connect them. air terminals. and number of elements in the system. mechanical equipment. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar.Fire Prot view. and pipe or duct is created. close the 3D Fire Prot view.Remember to resolve disconnects.Fire Prot view. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. select a pipe segment. verify that 30 is specified. and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. boilers. check connectivity. such as VAV boxes. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System). fitting. 126 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. you can select the pipe or duct. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. or sprinkler that is connected to the current wet system. and maximize the 2 . The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For System Name. verify that None is specified. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. and AC units. For System Equipment. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. 130 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. 129 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. Select Multiple. Connecting the Sprinklers | 397 . IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. radiators. Next. For Number of Elements. Connect the upper section of the level 2 wet system 127 If the windows are tiled. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). click Add To System. system equipment. 128 In the 2 . Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.

click Finish. 135 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Notice that the Options Bar now reports that there are 66 Number of Elements (sprinklers) in the system. 132 Place the cursor outside Office 6 in the upper-left corner of the building. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active.This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). click Finish System. 398 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The selected sprinklers display in red. You cannot select them. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. 134 On the Options Bar. 133 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected.

click System Browser. expand Piping. 137 With the cursor over the sprinkler. Connecting the Sprinklers | 399 . and click Expand All. place the cursor over a newly added sprinkler. right-click Fire Protection Wet. Notice that all of the sprinklers have been assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system. you confirm the system in the System Browser. 139 Under Systems. press TAB twice to confirm the entire system. Also notice that the Unassigned folder is not listed.Confirm the level 2 wet system 136 In the 2 _Fire Prot view. 138 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB once to confirm the upper half of the system. 140 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. This is because you assigned all of the sprinklers that you had placed to a system. Notice that the upper section of the system connects to the lower section. Next. and click Select.

143 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type.The logical connection displays in red confirming the level 2 wet system. and select a newly added sprinkler. Next. The Layout Path tool activates. you are confirming the logical connection between system elements. 144 On the Options Bar. Click . NOTE Remember that when you confirm systems. Create piping for upper section of the wet system 141 Click Modify on the Design Bar. After placing system components. and select solution 5. you physically connect these sprinklers with piping. TIP You do not need to select a system or have system elements (such as sprinklers) logically connected to a system to access the Layout Path tool. not piping which is the physical connection. 142 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. ■ 400 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . verify that Solutions is selected. The newly added sprinklers are logically connected. select any system component to access Layout Path on the Options Bar.

146 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You now verify the conversion settings that you specified in an earlier exercise.The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. click Settings. 148 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2750 mm above level 2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected.0 is specified. click Finish Layout. 145 On the Options Bar. 150 Click OK. Notice that the main connects to the open end of the cross fitting. 149 Verify that the pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch as for Main. 147 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet. select Branch. The selected solution is consistent with the design of the existing pipe run. 151 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. verify that 2750. verify that Main is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Connecting the Sprinklers | 401 . Next. as there is a vertical main and horizontal branches. you verify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a physical pipe run.

You will resolve these disconnects when you consolidate the branches. Remember to resolve disconnects. check connectivity. Complete the level 2 wet system pipe run 152 Using the methods that you learned on the lower pipe run. modify the upper pipe run to consolidate the branches and simplify the piping design according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ ■ Use Pipe Type : Fire Protection Wet.The fire protection pipe geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the upper wet system sprinklers to the lower wet system sprinklers at the cross fitting. 402 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . this is because the pipe run (most likely the main) is disconnected. Use M_Pipe Endcap : M_Standard. If a No auto-route solution found warning displays after you create the pipe run. Next. you complete the pipe run. and place an endcap on the cross fitting at the top end of the main. and validate the geometry.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click (Copy). As with the wet system. click File menu ➤ Save. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. Place sprinklers 2 Enter ZR. and pipe geometry was confirmed in the 3D view. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 32. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. you create the dry fire protection system. and double-click 2 . 3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 33. Open the m Creating the Dry System. In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Finally. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser.Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. The pipes in this system do not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire.You have completed the level 2 fire protection wet system. Connectivity was checked. 154 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. In the next exercise. You also converted pipe fittings and placed endcap fittings. After creating the system. and draw a zoom region around Server Room 32. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 403 . you used various methods to modify pipe segments to bring the system design more in line with the specifications.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 153 If you want to save your work. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. enter Connecting the Sprinklers Training for File name.

7 Move the cursor to the right along the same horizontal ceiling grid and into the Server Room 32. 8 Move the cursor diagonally to the upper-left. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. click to specify the copy start point. 404 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . Verify that Copy is selected.5 On the Options Bar. and after the intersection snap displays. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. 6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler.

select M_Sprinkler-Dry_Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 15mm Dry Pendent. 10 While pressing CTRL.9 Click Modify. select both sprinklers. 11 In the Type Selector. The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling. you change the sprinkler type. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps. Next. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 405 . while pressing CTRL. 14 In the drawing area. click System Browser. Expand Unassigned to view the 2 dry sprinklers that you placed. Create the dry system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. 13 Under Systems. select both Server Room 32 sprinklers. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. Next. The System Browser opens. you create the dry system to logically connect the 2 sprinklers. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. You can also turn off snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps).

15. verify that 15mm is selected. 25 In the Layout Options dialog. 22 In the Type Selector.15 On the Options Bar. In the System Browser. 406 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . and click Select The selected system displays in red. 17 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and the Default Fire Protection Dry system category is considered empty.Fire Prot to make it the active view. 21 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. Confirm and validate the system 16 In the System Browser. and so on. double-click 2 . for Slope Angle. and click Select. you create the pipe run to physically connect the sprinklers. Next. and for each sprinkler. 24 On the Options Bar. All sprinklers in the system are listed under the system connecting them. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. right-click. You have confirmed and validated the system. and after the intersection snap displays. click the sprinklers to it. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. enter 0. and click OK. Create the dry system pipe run 19 In the Project Browser. For Offset.0 is specified. click Options. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red. the dry system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser. Next. you can view system information including flow. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign Notice that after you click . Notice that the Default Fire Protection Dry system category no longer displays. 20 Zoom in on Server Room 32. 23 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). 26 Place the cursor outside Office 33 and over the vertical main pipe that services the wet system. The sprinklers are logically connected. IMPORTANT The new system named Fire Protection Dry 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Fire Protection Dry in the Piping folder. 18 Expand Fire Protection Dry 1. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. click Pipe. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. This indicates that you have assigned all of the dry sprinklers to a system. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. Each selected sprinkler displays in red. sprinkler size. verify that 2750.

29 Select the unconnected Server Room 32 sprinkler. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 407 . Next. click . Watch for the centerline and connector snaps. 28 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler.27 Draw the pipe run to the right. and connect to the lower sprinkler as shown. Notice that the pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper Server Room 32 sprinkler. You can confirm this in the 3D Fire Prot view or by checking connectivity. 30 On the Options Bar.

indicating that they are connected. and select each pipe segment to verify the slope. click Options. Next. 35 Zoom in on the pipe to validate that the pipe geometry is as expected. Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 32 In the Project Browser. To follow good design practice. 34 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. Next. and press TAB 3 times. 408 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . you check connectivity and validate the pipe geometry. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. you connect the fire protection system pipe run to the supply pipe. 31 Zoom the view. 37 On the Edit toolbar. click (Create Similar). You can click the slope control to change the slope direction.The sprinkler connects into the pipe. under Fire Protection. expand 3D views. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. 33 Zoom in on Server Room 32. 38 On the Options Bar. and double-click 3D Fire Prot. Notice that the slope displays next to the slope control. 36 Select the vertical main pipe. and all pipe fittings are automatically added.

draw the pipe to the left and connect it to the main as shown. 41 Using the methods that you learned when consolidating branches. select Family and Type. enter 0. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. you connected the fire protection pipe run to the supply pipe that provides water to the fire protection system. do the following: ■ Under Category. if you use the Create Similar tool.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. click Schedule/Quantities. 42 Check connectivity. then all connector parameters and the type of the selected object are matched. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 32. enter Creating the Dry System Training for File name. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 409 . You have completed the dry fire protection system. checked pipe connectivity. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. select Count. and click Add. 1 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. always verify that the pipe type is correct in the Type Selector. 4 Under Available fields. and click Save. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Define a schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Sprinklers. After the system was completed. click the Training Files icon. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser. the pipe type and other properties match the vertical main that you selected. under Available fields. Notice that you did not need to verify the pipe type because Create Similar matches the connector parameters and the type of the selected object. navigate to the folder of your choice. IMPORTANT When drawing pipe either by using the Pipe draw tool on the Design Bar. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. Click OK. and click OK. This adds the Count field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. you placed dry system sprinklers. This eliminates the need to verify the type in the Type Selector each time you create pipe. This clears the slope. or by right-clicking a connector. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. 40 Zoom in on the supply pipe located in Stairwell 30. 43 In the Save As dialog. Then.39 In the Layout Options dialog. . you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. Additionally. ■ ■ Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and click Add to add the field to the list. In this case. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Open the m Modifying Pipe Diameters. In this exercise. for Slope Angle. However. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and in the 3D view validate the pipe geometry. First. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

TIP When you tile 2 views. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ Count Family and Type Next. Click OK twice.Fire Prot to make the view active. and that it is sorted according to family and type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. For Then by. Verify that Ascending is selected. Notice that only the data for the level 2 sprinklers displays. 410 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . A new view called Sprinkler Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. select Family and Type. Note that this option is not available if the active view is the only open window. There is a grand total of 68 sprinklers on level 2. 5 Select a field. Select Grand totals. 11 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 9 In the Project Browser. Tile the views 7 In the Project Browser.If you need to remove a field from the list. 8 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Organize the data 6 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you tile the floor plan and 3D views. select it. Next. You may need to drag the column dividers to modify the column width. You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and double-click 3D Fire Prot to make the view active. 10 Enter WT to tile both windows. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and click Remove. you modify the pipe diameters. and clear Itemize every instance. Next. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. and double-click 2. you specify how the data will be organized in the schedule. You can refer to this sprinkler total as you modify the pipe diameters in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. verify that (none) is selected. the active view is tiled to the left.

Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 12 In the 2. width.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Changing the diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 411 . starting at the upper-left corner of the building. 14 In the Filter dialog. This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. height. select the supply pipe in the stairwell to remove it from the selection. or height. or width. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations.Fire Prot view. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection pipe run. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. click . click Check None. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. 15 Click in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. width. and while pressing SHIFT.

verifying that it is connected. Modify the diameter of the main 19 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. 18 Place the cursor over a pipe segment. Next. you modify the diameter the main. 17 Select any pipe segment and verify the 25mm diameter on the Options Bar. You changed the diameter for the pipe run because the majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers.16 On the Options Bar. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. and the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for these pipes. For D: (diameter). 412 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . select 25mm. and press TAB twice. All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 25mm diameter except for the supply pipe. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.

while pressing CTRL. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. 20 With the main selected. and the supply pipe.NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 413 . the pipe fittings. The selected main pipe displays in red. If branch segments are selected. draw a pick box around the horizontal main.

especially around the pipe fittings.You want to maintain the original supply pipe diameter. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 Validate the pipe run geometry. for D:. select the supply pipe to remove it from the selection. 21 Click in a blank space in the 3D Fire Prot view to make it active. select the supply pipe. 414 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . The diameter of the fire protection main changes. while pressing SHIFT. 24 In the 3D view. so you need to exclude the supply pipe. 22 In the 3D view. verify that the diameter is 150mm. select 100mm. and on the Options Bar.

27 Enter ZR. 28 Select the first pipe segment that services Conference Room 31 and directly connects to the main. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 415 . You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the code requirements.Modify the diameter of branch pipes 26 Click in the 2 . and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 rooms in the building.Fire Prot view to make it active. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers.

Click Tags. you tag some of the pipes enabling you to identify their diameters. 38 Click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category. The pipe segments including the elbow and 2 tee fittings display in red. Later in this exercise. The rest of this pipe branch services 2 sprinklers. The 25mm pipe diameter complies with the design criteria. zoom in on the branch that you modified. under Category. and after the segment highlights. and 2 in the open space). Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. The pipe diameter is modified. Next. 39 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment that connects the conference room branch to the main. select 40mm to comply with the design criteria. 32 Place the cursor over the pipe segment that connects the conference room sprinklers to the Open 2 sprinkler. 31 On the Options Bar. press TAB twice to highlight the pipe segments and fittings. 30 Select the next pipe segment to the right. Tag the pipes 34 In the 2 . 29 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. for D:. for D:. The specifications requires a diameter of 50mm for this pipe segment. for D:. 416 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . This segment services 5 sprinklers. You can verify this selection in the 3D view. Next. and click to select them.Fire Prot view. Clear Leader. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.This pipe segment services 6 sprinklers (4 in the office and conference room. you continue to modify the pipe branch. for Pipes. select 50mm. 37 In the Tag dialog. 36 On the Options Bar. select 40mm. you will complete the branch diameter modification. click to place the tag. verify that M_Pipe Size Tag is loaded.

select Leader. and finish placing the pipe tags.NOTE Tags are view specific. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 417 . 41 Place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. 40 On the Options Bar. Next. Next. 43 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. They display only in the view in which they were placed. you place a tag and include a leader line. 42 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). you finish modifying the pipe run diameters.

Sprinklers Serviced 1. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using a floor plan and the 3D view. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 2 3 4. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 45 In the Save As dialog. In the lesson. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. In this exercise. This completes the Designing Fire Protection Systems lesson. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. navigate to the folder of your choice. and finish tagging the pipes. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Finally. you confirmed the logical systems using the System Browser. enter Modifying Pipe Diameter Training for File name.Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 44 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. 418 | Chapter 5 Fire Protection Systems . each system was completely different. For additional practice. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. and click Save. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. you tagged the pipes. Although the creation and modification methods remained the same. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system consisting of sprinklers and piping. The completed fire protection system is included in the m Completed Fire Protection System. In this tutorial. finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. Finally.

Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. exterior fire stairs.Documenting Your Projects 2 In this section of the tutorials. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. and a roof garden. balconies. lofty ceilings. 419 . The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2008.

slight modifications to the building design have been made. 420 | Chapter 6 Documenting Your Projects .NOTE For training purposes.

section. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. including plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 421 .Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 6 In this tutorial.

you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.Creating Views In this lesson. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. 422 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you learn how to create views from a building model. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

4 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 423 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.rvt. select Level 2. under Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.

hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. double-click Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. under Floor Plans. 424 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Next. and click OK.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click 1: 1000. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 13 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. enter Vicinity Plan.

17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 425 . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.16 Right-click.

click Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. select1:100. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 426 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Elevation: Building Elevation.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. under Elevations. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 On the Design Bar. enter South East. and click OK. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 427 . 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser.

click Section. select 1:100. 428 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. select Section: Building Section. for Scale. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Views (all). ■ Move the cursor down.

and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 429 . Click the midpoint of the section line. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment.

23 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.21 On the Design Bar. 430 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 Select gridline F. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Modify.rvt. Creating Callout Views | 431 . Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

select Floor Plan. click Modify. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. and specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. and select the callout boundary. 432 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Callout. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. for Scale. under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select 1:50. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK.■ Select the middle grip. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Creating Callout Views | 433 . 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 9 In the Rename View dialog.

434 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. click Callout. 14 On the Options Bar. for Scale. select Detail View: Detail. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. under Sections (Building Sections).Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select 1:50. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. double-click Section 1.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. 18 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 435 . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details).

the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Existing stair callout head and boundary 436 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Level 1. clear any others. select Custom-Section Head. enter Section Head – Custom. click Duplicate. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK. click Training Files. click Load into Project. scroll to Section Line.Custom. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 On the floor plan. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.rfa. open Metric\Families\Annotations. . 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select Section Head . Modifying View Tag Appearance | 437 . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. select the section line. Section Tail – Filled. Section Tail . 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click Open.Filled. click Edit/New. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. under Floor Plans. and can be applied to the section line. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. for Section Head.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select the current project. and click OK twice.rvt. 8 In the Name dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 15 Under Category.

and click Open. and on the Options Bar. select Square.rfa.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.5mm Square. click Duplicate. select 3. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. and select 3. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 12. open Metric\Families\Annotations. On the floor plan. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags.5 mm. scroll to Section Marks. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. For Line Weight.5mm Square. and select 2. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select 12. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. clear all others. click Load into Project. 27 Click OK twice. enter 12. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 30 On the Design Bar. 19 Click OK. 17 Under Category. click Training Files. 438 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 22 In the Name dialog. Click OK. On the floor plan. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select the current project. notice the square elevation markers that display. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. . 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. For Dimensions ➤ Width. select Custom-Callout Head.

48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 40 Press ESC. 39 Click OK twice. select the callout. . Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 34 In the Name dialog. select . 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 43 Under Category. 36 In the drawing. enter 6 mm. 45 For Line Pattern. expand Callout Boundary. click the Annotation Objects tab. scroll down to Callout Boundary. enter . Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. for Callout Tag. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. and select 4. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 439 . click Duplicate. click Edit/New. For Corner Radius.33 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Under Category. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 49 Click OK. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. and select 7. select Dash. Click OK. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and on the Options Bar. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.

Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. click Training Files. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. To accomplish this. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. You learn to create view templates. view regions. and double-click East. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and apply it to multiple elevation views. and visual overrides. filters. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. masking regions. 440 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. under Elevations. The crop region displays as red.

click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. clear Entourage. click Zoom to Fit. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. under Elevations. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 441 . under Extents. under Visibility. 4 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. 6 On the Project Browser. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 5 On the View Toolbar.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab. right-click East. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Under Visibility. 8 Click OK.

right-click North. 18 In the View Templates dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. elevation markers. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. under Elevations. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. and section lines are now hidden in the view. and click OK. and click Create View Template From View. right-click East. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 442 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . grids. double-click North. click Apply. Callouts. click OK.14 Click OK. 15 On the View Control bar. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. levels.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click Properties. for Bottom. click Edit. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. double-click Penthouse. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. View Range and Plan Regions | 443 . 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 2 In the Project Browser. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Under View Depth.rvt. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Click OK twice. select Level Below (Level 4). under Floor Plans.rvt. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Level Below (Level 4). under Extents. for Level. select Penthouse. for View Range. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.

Under View Depth. for Level.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 444 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit. select Level 4. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Roof Plan. for Bottom. for View Range. select Level 4. and click Properties. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Roof Plan. under Extents. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click. Click OK twice.

15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Unlimited. 11 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 445 . and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Edit. 16 On the Design Bar. for View Range. 17 On the Design Bar. Under View Depth. click Region Property. click Finish Sketch. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). for Level. Move you cursor diagonally. click Plan Region. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building. select Unlimited. under Extents. for Bottom. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. Click OK twice.

under Views (all). 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. in this case. and double-click Level 1. 6 In the Filter Name dialog.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Fire Rating. 5 In the Filters dialog. the fire rating of the walls.rvt. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. click (New). 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 446 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the Filters tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. and click OK. click Edit/New. under Filters. 7 In the Filters dialog. enter Rated Walls. select Walls. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. under Categories. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. After you apply the filter.

11 Select Rated Walls. Enter Hr. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. for Color. and click OK.■ ■ Select contains. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. 16 Click OK. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click OK. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select the red color. click Remove. for Rated Walls. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 10 On the Filter tab. click Add. under Projection/Surface. 9 Click OK. select Solid Fill. 12 On the Filter tab. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 Using the same method. 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. click No Override. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Override under Patterns. for Pattern. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View | 447 . you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. under Basic colors.

rvt. as shown. under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 On the View menu. and click Rename. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click. 448 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Show Crop Region. and click OK. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the View Control Bar.

click (Rectangle). 8 Select the crop region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Masking Portions of a View | 449 . click Masking Region.7 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.

and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 1 In the Project Browser. 450 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. right-click Unit 18 Plan . click Finish Sketch. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan.Level 1.14 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.

under Visibility. and click Rename. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. 7 Under Cut. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Override. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. select Walls. under Pattern Overrides. for Color. for Pattern. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click. click in the Patterns field. and click OK. right-click. 4 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click No Override. Working with Visual Overrides | 451 . 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click the current scale. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click 1: 50. select Solid fill.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.

16 Under Visibility. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Grids. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. clear Floors. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. 452 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Visibility.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 453 .18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

click Override. 29 In the Color dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. 23 In the Color dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click By Category Override. 28 For Color. under Lines. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Pattern. 25 Click OK twice. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. right-click. and click OK. and click OK twice. click No Override. select a bright green color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 454 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Right-click. click Projection Lines. select Dash. click a purple color. 21 Under Projection/Surface. for Color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog.

33 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps.30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Working with Visual Overrides | 455 . click . click . right-click. The hidden crop region is also revealed. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click View. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. click Sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. and click OK.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 456 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric.34 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and select the title block. click Modify.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. enter A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). 3 In the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets | 457 . click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .Unnamed. expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Number. For Sheet Name. enter Site Plan. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 5 When the title block highlights.

enter 15 May. 2007. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter 2007-1. click Modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for Project Address. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. MA 12345 12 Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 7 On the Design Bar. For Project Status. For Client Name. under Other. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 458 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Smith. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. For Project Name. For Project Number. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter For Approval. 14 Click OK. enter J.■ Click OK.

and drag it to the sheet.Sections A108 .Elevations A105 . select the new sheet name. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Adding Views to Sheets | 459 . select A0 metric. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 1.Layout Plan A104 . under Sheets (all).Elevations A106 .rvt. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. double-click A102 . and click OK. click Modify.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.rvt.Stairs In the following exercise. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 On the Design Bar. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. for Name. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. enter Floor Plan. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 2 In the Project Browser.Floor Plan. and click to place the view. right-click. you add views to these sheets. and click Save.

and click to place it. click Modify. align it with the East elevation.Elevations. under Sheets (all). drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.The red border around the view no longer displays. double-click A104 . 6 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 460 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

and click OK. and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 461 . under Sheets (all). and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and on the Options Bar. 16 Select title bar. select 1:5. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. . and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. for View Scale. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. double-click A107 .

zoom in to the grip.Stairs. under Sheets (all). double-click Level 1.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and click to place it. 19 On the Design Bar. move the cursor over it. and press TAB until it highlights. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. click Modify. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 462 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 Zoom to the stair callout. double-click A108 . under Floor Plans.

In order to do this.Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. double-click A107 .22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.rvt. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 463 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).

4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. and press ENTER. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 7 In the Project Browser.2 Select the building section view. right-click. enter 16700 mm. and click Deactivate View. click Modify. 6 Right-click. 464 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Activate View. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click North. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.

For Sheet Name. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The camera view displays. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter Title Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 7 Place the camera as shown. select the new sheet name. and click Properties. right-click. enter T. click Camera. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select A0 metric. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 465 . After you create the sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. and click OK. double-click Level 1.

14 Under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 11 On the View Control Bar. for Eye Elevation. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Camera. 13 In the Project Browser. For Far Clip Offset. Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. 466 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter 1500 mm. enter 18000 mm For Target Elevation. select Far Clip Active.8 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.Title Sheet. Under Extents. double-click T . 12 On the View Control Bar. enter100000 mm.

24 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. click Size. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. under Graphics. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. Under Model Crop Size. for Show title. and click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 467 . click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. 22 In the Name dialog. and then click OK. click Modify. Click Apply. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select No. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. . on the Options Bar. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 635 mm.15 With the view selected.

468 | Chapter 6 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

Tagging and Scheduling 7 In this tutorial. in your Revit MEP 2008 projects. such as room and window schedules. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules. 469 .

Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Level 1. click Training Files. and click Room and Area. 470 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.Tagging Objects In this lesson. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Because of the open style floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. click Room Separation.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 471 . and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.

rfa. 15 On the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. click Room. click OK. The room tag number displays in blue. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. verify that Tag on placement is selected. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. and click to place the room and tag. 472 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged.7 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. indicating that it can be edited. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 9 In the Tags dialog. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the room tag.

click Modify.16 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER. click it. Click to place the new room and tag. 17 Click the room text label. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter Entry. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 18 On the Design Bar. click Room. and press ENTER. enter U18-1. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 473 .

22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 21 Click the room text label. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 474 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Dining. enter Kitchen. Sequential letters are also supported. 20 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify.

Level 1. expand Lines. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 26 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. but they need to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). The rooms are already placed. you learn how to place door and window tags. expand Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Tagging Doors and Windows | 475 . Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Level 2.rvt. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. clear Room Separation. Model Categories tab. and moving clockwise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Project Browser. click Room Tag. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and click OK. click Modify.rvt. double-click Unit 18 Plan .

click Tag ➤ By Category. for Mark. enter U18-2. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. and press ENTER. clear Leader. under Identify Data. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter U18-1. click Modify. click (Properties).2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 476 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 3 On the Options Bar.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. double-click Unit 18 Plan . rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. select Door Tags. Tagging Doors and Windows | 477 . under Category.Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK.

21 Click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. click Load. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 19 In the Tags dialog.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. and double-click Level 1. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Window. 478 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and modify the tag placement and display. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.rfa. and click OK.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. 25 Under Floor Plans. Tagging Other Objects | 479 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. select Leader. 26 On the View toolbar.Level 1. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag All Not Tagged. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 4 Select a dining room chair. click Yes to load a tag. 5 At the confirmation prompt. 27 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Training Files. click Tag ➤ By Category. 28 Select Window Tags. Zoom flyout. double-click Level 2.

9 Click Modify. 11 Select the tag for the table.8 Select the furniture in the living room. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 12 Click the elbow control. and drag it above the chair tag. and on the Options Bar. and drag it up to form an angled leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 14 Click Modify. 480 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 13 Optionally. clear Leader.

click (Filter Selection). Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Modify. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. and on the Design Bar.Level 2. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. Tagging Other Objects | 481 . click Tag All Not Tagged.

Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. and click OK. 482 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. select Furniture Tags. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 22 In the Type Selector. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. you learn to add schedules. and click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson.21 In the Filter dialog. click Check None.

rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Finally.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Creating a Window Schedule | 483 . that is. in which windows are listed by window type.

Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand Floor Plans. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 For Name. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and click View. 6 Under Available fields. and double-click Level 1. select Comments and click Add. 484 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 7 Using the same method. select Windows. click Schedule/Quantities. enter Building Window Schedule. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click the Fields tab. under Category. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Click OK.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

NOTE By clicking Show. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. click Edit. click Show. for Sorting/Grouping. and click OK twice. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. However. and click View Properties. right-click the schedule. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. select Type Mark. for Sort by. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. in large building models with many views. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. If no open view shows the selected element.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click Close. and on the Options Bar. this can be a time-consuming process. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. 13 In the Project Browser. you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. Creating a Window Schedule | 485 .

change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. double-click Level 2. sorted by type mark. and press ENTER. The window type schedule is displayed. and click View Properties. for Sorting/Grouping. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule. clear Itemize every instance. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. under Floor Plans. 486 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. 22 Click OK twice. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. click Edit.The window schedule is displayed. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule.

The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.rvt. For Group parameter under. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and sill conditions for a window can be found. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Discipline. expand Schedules/Quantities. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories.rvt. click OK. click Add to create the new parameter. In this case. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. jamb. select Type. unlike shared parameters. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. enter Head Detail. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. for Name. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Under Parameter Data. and double-click Building Window Schedule. you cannot use them to tag objects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 487 . select Construction. 5 Click OK.

click in the Head Detail header. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. 14 On the Options Bar. under Other. click Group. 488 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Head Detail. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP To select all 3 headers. under Available fields. for Fields. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and while pressing the left mouse button. enter Window Details. so that they are listed before Comments. right-click Building Window Schedule. Jamb Detail.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. and Sill Detail. select the following fields. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. 12 Click OK twice. and click Properties.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. enter 2/A107. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. and for Sill Detail. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. for Head Detail.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. Under Name. For example.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule.Door Schedule. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Verify Schedule building components is selected. Enter U18 in the third field. enter 3/A107. under Type Mark A. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Select contains in the second field. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 Click OK. select Doors. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 489 .Level 1. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. enter Unit 18 . 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the following fields. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. for Jamb Detail. 6 Under Available fields. enter 1/A107. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. click the Fields tab. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. You then hide the column used for the filter.

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). select Family and Type.Door Schedule. expand Sheets (all). click Modify. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Mark. 9 Click the Formatting tab. and drag it to the sheet.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. select Hidden Field. 15 On the Design Bar. 490 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and double-click A102 . click Unit 18 . 11 Under Field formatting. but is not included as a column in the schedule.Unit 18. 10 Under Fields. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet.

double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. right-click in the Design Bar.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. and click View. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. click Schedule/Quantities. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 7 To the right of Header text. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. select Rooms. 19 On the Design Bar. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. and click Add. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Click OK.rvt. Creating a Room Schedule | 491 . select Number. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 5 Using the same method. under Available fields. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font.

enter Storage. select Storage. enter Corridor. 11 Using the same method. enter Building Entry. click New. for room 101. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. next to Rows. 492 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 103. The room Number is U17-9. For 104. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 102. For 105. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Corridor. and press ENTER. 101-106. add 5 more rooms. for Name.

For Room Separation. expand Lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 493 . and modify room names. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.rvt. click the Lines field. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. Under Custom colors. click the bright green swatch.■ For 106. click Room Separation. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and press ENTER. click Override. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Lines field. click the Color field. enter Stair. under Floor Plans. select 9. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. place rooms from a program list. under Projection/Surface. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For Weight. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. you add room separation lines. double-click Level 1.

draw the horizontal line.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. click Room. First. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 494 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

13 For Offset. for Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 495 .Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 10 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). for Room. 12 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. enter 2400 mm.

496 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Room Schedule. 18 In the Project Browser. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. under Floor Plans. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Level 1.

27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Modify. select Rooms. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and Wall Finish. and click OK. 26 Select Schedule keys. and for all 3 finishes. click New to add a new row. double-click Room Schedule. select Base Finish. and click OK. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. Floor Finish. clear Room Bounding. 30 For Key Name. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. click Schedule/Quantities. while pressing CTRL. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and click Add. 22 On the Design Bar. under Category. under Available fields.19 While pressing CTRL. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 497 . enter As Selected. 23 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). click (Properties). 29 On the Options Bar. enter Units. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.

for Room Style. click Check None. and click Properties. under Other. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 32 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. right-click Room Schedule. click Edit. 498 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Add. click Room Style. double-click Level 1. click (Filter Selection). and click OK.31 Using the same method. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. select Units. click Zoom To Fit. 39 On the View toolbar. 36 In the Project Browser. for Available fields. double-click Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. for Fields. 35 Click OK twice. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Filter dialog. Zoom flyout. 37 Under U17-8.

enter Room Type. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. expand Floor Plans. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Identity Data. and click Properties. 103. 6 For Color. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Room Type. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and 106. 104. select Units. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. double-click Room Schedule. select Room Style. select Public. click the Color Scheme field. 5 For Title. under Views (all). For rooms 102 and 105. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Name. click (Duplicate). select Service.rvt. click (Properties). click OK. 8 Click OK. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and apply it to the Level 1 view. enter Room Type. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. at the warning prompt. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 499 . under Schedules/Quantities. right-click Level 1. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Room Style.43 On the Options Bar.

select the color legend. expand Lines. and click OK twice. click Edit Color Scheme. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. select blue. and click OK. 21 In the second row of the table (Public).12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 500 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Foreground. click Modify. click Color Scheme Legend. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. for Display Color Fill in. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Visible. 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit. and clear Room Separation. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. click the value in the Color column. under Custom color. 22 In the Color dialog.

click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. on the Options Bar. and click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 501 . for Swatch Width. 28 Under Title Text. for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 5 mm.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK. (Properties). enter 25 mm.

double-click {3D}. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. click Modify. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.29 On the Design Bar. 502 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.

Under Field formatting. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 9 Using the same method. under Category. select Material: Area.EPDM. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Then by. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Roofs. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Creating a Material Takeoff | 503 . 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Clear Itemize every instance. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Add. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Family and Type. under Available fields. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 12 Click OK. and click OK. select Calculate totals.3 While pressing CTRL. click Family and Type. select Material: Description. 4 In the Type Selector. 11 Click the Formatting tab.Insulation on Plywood Deck . The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. click Modify. Select Grand totals.

20 Click OK. and click Properties.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 17 Click Calculated Value. and click OK twice. click Edit. for the Material: Cost field. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.80 5. for Fields. select Calculate totals. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 504 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. for Name. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 19 For Formula. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 24 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. under Available fields. 21 Click the Formatting tab. and click Add. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 23 In the Material Takeoff.40 50. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. click Estimated Cost. click Material: Cost. and under Fields. 22 For Field formatting. enter Estimated Cost. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated.

creating a generic tag to tag the family. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 505 .rvt. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. You draw a travel path line. For Rounding. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. For Units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. regardless of category. and reporting the shared parameters. 27 Click Field Format. click Training Files.25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Formatting. select 2 decimal places. and schedule the total distance of each path. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. These shared parameters can be added to any family. click Estimated Cost. tag the line. select Fixed. and are defined and stored in an external file. In this lesson. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you create a shared parameter file. adding the shared parameters to a family. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. you create an exiting plan for the building. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. click Edit. 28 Click OK 3 times. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. either within family components or within the project template. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fields.

and click OK. 506 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . enter Travel Distance. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. click Create. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. and click OK. and click OK. select Length. for Name. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Type of Parameter. for Name.rvt. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. under Floor Plans. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Groups. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As.txt. 7 Under Parameters. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. enter Path ID. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. and click Save. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. enter Exiting. 11 Click OK. for Name. click New. click Training Files. for File name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog.

click Family Types. 3 On the Design Bar. select Shared parameter. following the equals symbol (=). 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Constraints. 11 In the Family Types dialog. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Click Training Files.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. group it under Dimensions. and click Select. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and click OK. enter Length. and click OK. otherwise the family loads into the current project. click Add. 13 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. under Dimensions. and select Instance. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 7 For Group parameter under. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. for Travel Distance Formula. click Load into Projects. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. 14 If necessary. click Add. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 507 . The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Parameters. 12 Click Apply. If you have multiple projects open. 8 Select Instance. under Parameters. and click OK.

under Parameters. click Modify. click Training Files. 508 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label. select Travel Distance. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Add.rft. click Label. click Select. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. 19 On the Design Bar.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. and click OK 3 times. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 26 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 24 On the Design Bar. 17 Select Generic Tag.rft. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog.

Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Tagging. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Path ID. Placing.Tagging.rvt. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. double-click Exiting Plan . for File Name. enter M_Travel Distance Tag.Level 1.rfa. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.27 In the drawing window. After the lines are tagged. 31 On the Design Bar. Placing. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. and press DELETE. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. and click Save. and click OK. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 509 . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and move it down. 30 In the Save As dialog. under Floor Plans.rvt is selected. click Load into Projects. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.

510 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . select Chain. above the exterior door as shown. click Component. 6 Move the cursor to the right. and click in the center of the corridor. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.

under Floor Plans. under Constraints. and click (Properties). 13 While pressing CTRL.Level 2. for Path ID. verify that Chain is selected. and click outside of the building.Tagging. Placing. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Move the cursor down. click Tag ➤ By Category. double click Exiting Plan . click Modify. enter 1-1. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Component. click Modify. through the door. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 511 . Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. select the 2 dashed travel lines. clear Leader. 12 On the Design Bar.

move the cursor to the left. move the cursor near the right corner. and click above the door to the stair. 21 On the Design Bar. and click. click Modify.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 512 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. 22 Click at the center starting point. 19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 20 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 513 . (Properties). under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click in the stair. click Modify. and click OK. under Category. 28 While pressing CTRL. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 24 On the Design Bar. enter Level 1 Exit Distance.23 Move the cursor down. for Path ID. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 33 For Name. 27 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK. Placing. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Training Files. and click View. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. enter 1-. 44 In the Project Browser. 41 Under Fields. select Travel Distance. select Calculate Totals. 43 In the Project Browser. select Path ID and Travel Distance.rvt. right-click the Design Bar. in the first field. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the second field. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Path ID. for Filter by. 45 In the Rename View dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. while pressing CTRL. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. select Path ID. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components. and click Rename. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Filter. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 514 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . and under Field formatting. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 35 Click the Filter tab. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 46 In the Project Browser. under Other. and click OK. in the third field. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select contains. 36 For Filter by. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click Add. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. enter 2-. click Edit. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. 40 Click the Formatting tab. and in the third field. and click OK twice. and click Properties. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 38 For Sort by. under Schedules/Quantities. under Available fields.

4 Under Available fields. and click OK. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. right-click Generic . for Assembly Code. select Walls. click C1010145 .152 mm.Partitions . click the Fields tab. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. expand C . and click the browse button.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 515 . and click Properties. under Categories. select the following fields. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Fixed Partitions. and click OK twice. click the Value field.Interiors\C10 .Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .2 In the New Schedules dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.

under Database Name. and click Next. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 10 When the confirmation displays. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 8 In the New Database dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. click OK. 516 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling . under Database.9 In the schedule. click the File Data Source tab. 3 Click New. 1 On the File menu. select a location for the database file. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 9 Under Directories.rvt. and click OK to create the database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 10 Close the exercise file. click Training Files. and click Next. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 Click Finish. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click OK in the dialog. Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. click Create. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.mdb for Database Name. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). Additionally. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. enter Revit_Project. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 517 . in addition to the Id column. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. For example.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.

518 | Chapter 7 Tagging and Scheduling .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 8 In this tutorial. 519 .

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 520 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Relocating a Project | 521 .rvt. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m.Relocating a Project In this exercise.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. If you did that now. 8 Select the Level 1 line. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. However. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you specify the new location of the project. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. and double-click South. 6 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. Under Constraints. click (Properties). select Shared. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The levels in the project are not shared. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. The south elevation is displayed. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. enter 10000 mm. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 10 On the View menu. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. enter8 mm Head . By selecting the Level 1 line.Shared Elevation. expand Views (all). to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 522 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 On the Options Bar. for Elevation Base. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. By entering 10000 mm in this step.

under Elevations.Shared Elevation. 12 In the Type Selector. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click North. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. Relocating a Project | 523 . 13 On the Design Bar. select Level : 8 mm Head . as well as other views of the building model.

select Level : 8 mm Head . the Penthouse level. 524 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . On the Design Bar.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. In the Type Selector. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. and the Roof Plan level. and select Levels 2-4.Shared Elevation. click Modify.

except when you sketch profiles to complete families. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. and angular dimensions. Dimensioning | 525 .rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Dimensioning In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. “Dimensioning” on page 525. radial. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. permanent dimensions are created automatically.16 If you want to save your changes. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. You place linear. In Revit MEP. and double-click Level 1. multi-segmented. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. click File menu ➤ Save As. In this case.

and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. and are created by selecting individual reference points. 526 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. snap to wall centerlines. select it. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. dimensions are aligned. By default.

5 Move the cursor above the view. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. The lock displays as locked. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. click Dimension. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Dimensions | 527 . click Modify. and click to place the dimension.

and select it. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. for Prefer. 17 Move the cursor up. 528 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select its left exterior face. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 12 13 On the Options Bar. select the right side of the curtain wall. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. above the plan view of the building. 11 Using the same method. select the right endpoint of the planter. select Wall Faces. 15 Move the cursor to the right. but below the first dimension that you placed. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected.

23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). 26 Select the radial dimension. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. select Wall faces. For Prefer. and select it. click Dimension. 21 On the Design Bar.19 On the Basics tab. Creating Dimensions | 529 . and specify a point to place the dimension. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. click Modify.

30 On the Basics tab. click (Properties). on the Options Bar. verify Wall faces is selected. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Typ. click Modify. 34 Select the horizontal line..28 With the dimension still selected. For Prefer. click Dimension. 530 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Suffix. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

38 Proceed to the next exercise.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. and click to place the dimension. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. click Modify. you select only the wall. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 37 On the Basics tab. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 531 . “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 531. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

click Dimension. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. 532 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Entire Walls. and select Widths. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. and double-click Level 3. select Openings. expand Views (all). select Wall centerlines. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. Click Options. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. Click OK. For Pick.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

7 On the Basics tab. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and click to place the automatic dimension string. click Modify. For example. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 533. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. Controlling Witness Lines | 533 . in some cases. However. expand Views (all).rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. When you place dimensions. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall.

verify Wall centerlines is selected. move the cursor down. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. select the right edge of the planter.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. and click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. and select it. select Individual References. For Pick. 534 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning .

11 Move the cursor down. and specify a point to place the dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 535 . and select it. 10 Using the same method. select the bottom right endpoint.

and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. for Prefer. 16 On the Design Bar.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select Wall centerlines. and when the wall centerline highlights. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and click to place the dimension. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. 13 On the Options Bar. 536 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and drag the dimension down the wall. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. click Modify. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. select it. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. click Dimension.

“Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 537. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 537 . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. and using the same methods. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 20 Release SHIFT. click Modify. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan.19 Release SHIFT. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. After you create the new family type. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. 22 On the Basics tab.

text font. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 2 Click (Properties). 538 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . enter Office Standard. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Edit/New. 5 In the Name dialog. select CityBlueprint.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. for Text Size. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.2 mm. For Text Font. select Arrow 30 Degree. and click OK. enter 3. click Duplicate.dimension tick mark. and select the lower dimension. Under Text. for Tick Mark. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

click Modify. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. select another font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 539 . If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. 10 On the Basics tab. 7 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. click Modify. and select the bottom dimension. 9 In the Type Selector.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. ■ Click OK twice.

You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 540. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. 540 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. select the angular dimension on the planter. 12 Proceed to the next lesson.11 Using the same method. create a new angular dimension type. and how to add leaders to the text notes. and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 541 . for Leader. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. but below the upper dimension string. zoom to planter near grid line 5. click (None). 3 On the Options Bar. click Text.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. and click and drag to create a text box. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.

542 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. If so. select Arc Leaders. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. enter EXISTING BUILDING.5 In the text box. click Modify. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click . enter 6 mm. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Edit/New. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the text box. click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Text Size. under Graphics. 11 Under Text.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Modify. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 15 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 543 . and enter Planting Bed.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. click Text.

and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. click Modify. click Modify. Under Graphics. Click Rename. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Standard Notes.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). select Arrow 30 Degree. and click OK. click Edit/New. 24 On the Design Bar. select CityBlueprint. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 20 On the Design Bar. for New. Click OK twice. In the Rename dialog. 544 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Text. for Text font. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. for Leader Arrowhead.

over the Planting Bed text. click Text. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. select Text: Standard Notes. for Leader. click (Arc).Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 545 . 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click to place the text box. 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.

33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. Wall.31 Click in the text box. 546 | Chapter 8 Annotating and Dimensioning . and enter 457 mm Conc. 32 If you want to save your changes.

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition.Detailing 9 In this tutorial. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. 547 . and metal studs. plywood. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2008. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

Detailing the View In this exercise. and insulation objects. you detail the view of the roof edge. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In order to detail from the building model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. region objects.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. After you add components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. add detail components. 548 | Chapter 9 Detailing .rvt. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. which means that all detail components. as well as detail lines. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you trace over the building model geometry. In the callout view. They are also view specific. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. You load detail components.

enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click . 8 Delete the component. and click Open.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. select Corrugated Metal. Detailing the View | 549 . click Yes to load a Detail Items family. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Exact location is not important.5mm. 16 Click OK twice. The roof overhang detail displays. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click Repeating Detail. 17 In the drawing area. click Duplicate. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 7 In the drawing area. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Detail Component. 5 In the alert dialog. select As underlay. double-click the detail callout head. enter 406. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component.rfa. 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar.

click (Move). Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. 550 | Chapter 9 Detailing . NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Modify. click Load.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Detail Component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.

Because you still have several components to load. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 31 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 30 On the Design Bar. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. Detailing the View | 551 . and click Open. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.rfa. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 25 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 34 In the Type Selector. click OK.rvt. click Training Files. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 32 To properly orient the component. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. click Detail Component.

select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. click the Flip instance arrows.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. click Insulation. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 36 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. 38 Click Modify. 552 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 39 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown.

43 Click Modify. click Detail Component. enter 140mm. ■ Click Modify. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. For Offset. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select to near side. 46 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 553 . and on the Edit toolbar. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. as shown. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. click (Move). select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal.

4 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. meaning they display only in this view. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.rvt. and lock the component. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 554. they are view specific. as shown. 52 Click Modify. select Thin Lines. Like detail components. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 554 | Chapter 9 Detailing . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed.48 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail.

as shown. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines | 555 . as shown. click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. select Thin Lines.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. For Offset. 7 In the Type Selector.

and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 18 In the Type Selector. 556 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown. draw the detail lines as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 16 On the Options Bar. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown. select Chain. select Thin Lines. click (Draw).

and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 In the Project Browser. select the Penthouse level line. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. click Detail Lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 10mm. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). When you turn the display model off. select Vapor Barrier. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click Properties. and press ENTER. select Do not display. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. right-click. 24 On the View Control Bar. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. For Offset. Adding Detail Lines | 557 . and click OK. 26 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

select M_Break Line. press SPACEBAR as necessary. you add text notes to complete the detail. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 30 In the Type Selector. click Text.rvt. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. “Adding Text Notes” on page 558. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.29 On the Design Bar. 558 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 32 Click Modify. click Detail Component.

and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 6 Click Modify. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 7 Select the dimension line.. and click OK. enter Typ. Adding Text Notes | 559 . Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Dimension. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click (Properties). for Text ➤ Suffix. click (Arc) to create an arced leader.2 On the Options Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter the text.

8 Zoom in to the metal coping. and save the exercise file. and click OK. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select a text note. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 7 Click Modify. while pressing CTRL. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. click 6 In the Filter dialog. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. click Select All Instances. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and selecting the chain. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. (Filter Selection). clear Detail Items and Dimensions.Keynotes. on the Options Bar. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and press DELETE.rvt. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. right-click. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. “Creating Detail Components” on page 560. pressing TAB. select all the coping linework.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Roof Overhang Detail. 560 | Chapter 9 Detailing . right-click.

click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Load into Projects.rft. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click it in the Project Browser. 22 Click Modify. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 23 Using a window. The original linework remains selected. Creating Detail Components | 561 . click Detail Component. and click Open. in the Type Selector. 16 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and click Save. 24 On the Options Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. click . Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. While pressing SHIFT. and click OK. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. enter Roof Edge. 21 To place the component. clear Detail Items.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Training Files. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 25 In the Filter dialog. 14 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the coping. navigate to your preferred location.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 18 In the Save As dialog. for File name.

“Adding Keynotes” on page 562. click Keynote ➤ Element. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 27 On the Design Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.26 Press DELETE. click Detail Component. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. delete the underlying linework. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the alert dialog. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.rfa. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click Open. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Load. Click to place the leader arm. click Training Files. you place keynotes on objects.rvt.rfa.B5. 63mm Rigid Insulation. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 562 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 30 In the drawing area. In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. and click Open. 28 On the Options Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.

Roof Edge4. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110. For the metal coping. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 11 Click OK 3 times. use keynote 06110. click in the Value column. use keynote 06160. 12 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. For the 50 x 150. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. select the metal fascia with drip edge.I1. 19mm Plywood. use keynote 07645. use keynote 09250.D11. FasciaProfile_1.C1.G1. Adding Keynotes | 563 . 6 Click Modify. navigate to 07645. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.F1. use keynote 06160. use keynote 06110.D1. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. click Edit/New. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. For the 50 x 200.D11.F1.

rft. click Lines. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 15 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. select Medium Lines. and click Modify. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. 17 Keynote the component. and click Save. 8 In the Save As dialog.A8. You do this in order to keynote the component. click Detail Component.rvt. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. click Load into Projects. 6 Lock the line. 18 Save the file. for File name. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 564. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 5 In the drawing area. using keynote 07460. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 564 | Chapter 9 Detailing . select Corrugated Metal. click Training Files. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 22mm Corrugated Steel . and select the right end point. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select the left end point of the reference line. navigate to your preferred location.20 Ga. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.

Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 565 . The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and click . 22 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. click Load. 29 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. 30 Click Modify. and click Open. 27 On the Design Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select the component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 25 Next. click Edit/New. click Detail Component. select Medium Line Detail Component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.11 Press DELETE. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New.A1. select m_Light Line Detail Component. and click OK. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 In the Name dialog. click the end points at the top of the roof. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and hidden) used in the view. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 Select the component. 37 Click OK 3 times. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. invisible. enter EPDM Membrane. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click Duplicate. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 24 While pressing CTRL. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click in the Value column. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and click (Properties). 13 In the Type Selector.

47 Select the component. 53 On the Options Bar. 40 Click Modify. 49 With the component selected. on the Edit toolbar. 44 On the Design Bar. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click . 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. click Detail Component.38 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. and click the lower end at the break line. click Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. 48 Using the same method used previously.A5. select Chain. 42 Using the same method used previously. and click . 566 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and assign it keynote 06110. 41 Select the component just added.G1. against the 3/4" plywood. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 46 Click Modify. (Move).

58 Using the method used previously.A4. leaving the detail component lines. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. name the component Vapor Barrier. and click . 60 On the Design Bar. 50 x 200 Framing. and assign it keynote 07260. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and Vapor Barrier. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 567 . add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 61 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element.55 Click Modify.

Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select the component. Enter 07463. The database file opens in a text editor. and close the text editor. and press TAB. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.rvt. in the Type Selector. name the component Batt Insul. 69 Using the method used previously. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.A4.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 568 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 72 Proceed to the next exercise..rfa. and press TAB. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. click Detail Component.A9. click Load into Projects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. add a keynote for the component. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 68 Select the component. 3 In the text editor. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.txt. and click . Enter 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 70 In the drawing area.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 71 Save the file. select Invisible Lines. and press ENTER. and assign it keynote 07210. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 67 In the drawing area. click File menu ➤ Save. 63 In the drawing area. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 568.A1.

you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. 11 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and click Open. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select all the keynotes. navigate to 07463.txt. and click OK.A1. click Keynote ➤ Element. you learn how to create a drafted detail. and click to place the note. and click OK. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. In the Type Selector. select Absolute. 14 Save the file. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 13 Click Modify. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. click to place the leader. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 9 In the drawing area. click Browse. After you create a drafting view. Creating a Drafted Detail | 569 . under Keynote Table. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. under Path Type.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Click Open. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. select 1 : 5. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.dwg. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 570. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select Black and white. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail.rvt. For Layer/Level Colors. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. and click Rename. click Callout. select Center-to-center. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files. enter EPDM Metal Coping. The detail that you import is in DWG format. select Reference other view. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 6 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 570 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and click OK. right-click Drafting 1.rvt. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.

4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. and click Properties. click Rename. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click the callout. click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Reference Callout | 571 . click Edit/New. and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. enter Detail . 12 Click OK twice. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. delete the existing value. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 6 Select the callout.No Reference. 5 Click Modify. for New. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays.

you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 572 | Chapter 9 Detailing . 3 On the View Control Bar. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail.rvt./Sect. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all)./Det. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . enter Header @ Sliding Door. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.Elev. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Save the file. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating a Detail in the Drafting View” on page 572 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. double-click A105 .No Reference). for Name. The callout is updated with the sheet information. and click OK.

Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 14 Click OK 3 times. Board. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 5 In the Type Selector. click . You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 18 While pressing CTRL.5mm. 19 In the Type Selector. 17 Click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Edit/New. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Name dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 573 . . click Detail Component. click Filled Region. select Wide Lines.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the width dimension. and enter 20. for Name. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. Draw a rectangle as shown. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click Region Properties. enter Gyp. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Duplicate.

click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror).20 On the Design Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. (Draw). click Finish Sketch. 574 | Chapter 9 Detailing . and click above the top of the region as the end point. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and on the Edit toolbar. 24 Select the mirrored region. click 22 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor up. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.

36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 30 In the Name dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 575 . click . click Duplicate. in the Type Selector. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. verify that the thickness is 19mm. click Region Properties. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. click (Align). 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Finish. .Finish. Draw a rectangle as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 33 Click OK 3 times. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.25 Click Modify. select Wood . enter Wood . for Name.

38 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region, sketch the new region as shown; verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63.5mm.

42 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add a reference plane
43 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 44 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick).

For Offset, enter 6mm, and press ENTER.

45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

46 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Align).

576 | Chapter 9 Detailing

47 Click the reference plane, and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 48 Click Modify.

Add a door panel
49 On the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 50 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 10mm, and press ENTER.

51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

■ ■ ■

For Offset, enter 0, and press ENTER. Select Chain.

53 Draw the door panel outline:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Move the cursor left 25mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm, and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm, and click to select the point.

54 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Trim/Extend).

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch, and select the bottom horizontal line. 56 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 577

Add mounting/sliding hardware
57 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Pick Lines).

For Offset, enter 3mm, and press ENTER.

60 Select the left, top, and right edges of the door panel region. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line, select the height dimension, enter 76.2mm, and press ENTER. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

Add mounting/sliding hardware
64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar, click Load. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown.

578 | Chapter 9 Detailing

TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation.

68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt; drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

70 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 71 On the Options Bar, click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side.rfa, and click Open. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail; use the images as a guide.

74 Select the expansion bolt; drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

Add detail lines
75 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 76 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 579

78 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector, select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar, click .

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown.

82 Select the rectangle, and on the Edit toolbar, click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar, click .

(Mirror).

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

580 | Chapter 9 Detailing

87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region; drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

89 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left, as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 581

92 Select the line, and on the Edit toolbar, click

(Mirror).

93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right, select the length dimension, enter 3mm, and press ENTER. 95 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line, draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 97 On the Options Bar, click .

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left, and click to place the arc as shown.

582 | Chapter 9 Detailing

99 Click Modify.

Add two break lines
100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 101 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector, select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.

Add dimensions
104 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area, select the left edge of the horizontal wood region, and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 106 Click to place the dimension, and click Modify.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 583

107 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown, and click Modify.

110 Select the dimension line; using the Drag Text grip, drag the text for the smaller dimension.

Add text notes to complete the detail
111 On the Design Bar, click Text. 112 In the Options Bar, click to create an arced leader.

113 In the drawing area, select the gypsum board region on the left, and click to place the text. 114 Enter Gyp. Board, and click Modify.

115 Select the note, and on the Options Bar, click

(Add Right Arc Leader).

116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region.

584 | Chapter 9 Detailing

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

118 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command. 119 Save the file.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 585

586 | Chapter 9 Detailing

Finishing the Sheets

10

In this tutorial, you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation, including:
■ ■

Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications, such as images and text into project sheets

■ ■

587

Using Note Blocks
In this lesson, you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building.

Creating a Note Block
In this exercise, you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats- Finishing-Sheets.rvt.

Load a generic annotation family
1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click East.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote - Hexagon.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

588 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown:

Create annotation marks for items requiring notes

10 With the tag selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Text, enter Seal existing doors and insulate, and click OK.

12 On the Edit toolbar, click

(Copy).

13 Select the tag, and click above the tag to place a copy.

Creating a Note Block | 589

14 With the copy selected, on the Options Bar, click

(Properties).

15 For Text, enter Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag, enter B. 17 Click OK. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.

19 On the toolbar, click

(Mirror), and on the Options Bar, clear Copy.

20 Select the tag on the left, and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building, as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image, position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays, and click.

590 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

21 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 22 Optionally, using the table as a reference, and moving counter-clockwise, continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration:
Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Remove all existing windows. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Repair as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Clean cut and repair wall as required.

Create, format, and place a note block on a sheet
23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. 24 In the New Note Block dialog, for Note block name, enter Exterior Construction Notes, and click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Tag, and click Add. Select Text, and click Add. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Tag.

Creating a Note Block | 591

■ ■

On the Formatting tab, for Heading, enter Mark, and for Alignment, select Center. On the Appearance tab, For Header text, verify Arial in the first field, enter 6 mm in the second field, and select Bold.

26 Click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.

27 In the column header (text), enter Description. 28 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A103 - Elevations. 29 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Exterior Construction Notes, and drag it to the sheet.

30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet, and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.

33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt, and click Save.

592 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Using Drawing Lists
In this lesson, you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.

Creating a Drawing List
In this exercise, you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet.

2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Fields tab, under Available fields, select Sheet Number, and click Add. Select Sheet Name, and click Add. On the Filter tab, for Filter by, in the first field, select Sheet Number, in the second field, select does not equal, and in the third field, enter T. On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Sheet Number.

4 Click OK. The drawing list displays.

5 In the list title field, enter Sheet Index. 6 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click T - Title Sheet. 7 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, select Sheet Index, and drag it to the sheet.

Using Drawing Lists | 593

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner, and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

9 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.

11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame schedule, and so on). NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Creating a Symbol Legend
In this exercise, you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Finally, you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson, Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt.

Create a legend view
1 On the View menu, click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog, for Name, enter Typical Symbol Legend, and click OK.

594 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets

Add symbols to the legend
3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Symbol. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view, selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

M_Section Head - Filled Level Head - Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote - Hexagon : Tag

Create a text type
5 On the Design Bar, click Text. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector, you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.

6 On the Options bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate, for Name, enter Legend Text, and click OK. 9 For Text Font, select Arial. 10 For Text Size, enter 3mm, and click OK twice.

Add text to the legend
11 In the Type Selector, verify that Text : Legend Text is selected, and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 13 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
■ ■ ■

Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag

Creating a Symbol Legend | 595

19 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Design Bar.Unit 18. double-click A102 .■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. and click to place it. 16 In the Type Selector. 596 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 18 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark. expand Legends. click Modify. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Sheets (all).

select Medium for Detail Level. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select1 : 50. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu.20 In the Type Selector. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. enter 900 mm. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Creating a Component Legend | 597 . 21 On the Design Bar. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Section. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. For View. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Legend Component. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. for Name. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. For Host length. and press ENTER. select Viewport : No Titlemark. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 For Scale. and click OK.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. click Text. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 598 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . for Family. 10 Select the second wall. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior.

18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. for Leader. 19 Enter the following text. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add text without a leader. Creating a Component Legend | 599 . and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking.13 On the Options Bar. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.

23 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all). under Legends. 25 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 600 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . under Floor Plans. double-click Level 4.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click New Sheet. under Floor Plans. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. drag it onto the sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Level 4. 29 In the project Browser. click Modify to end the command. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. The open drawings are both visible. 26 On the Design Bar.

Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. select the Wall Type 2 component. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. Creating a Component Legend | 601 . indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.

Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. select Medium for Detail Level. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. you 602 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. These changes can be due to owner requests. 36 On the View Control Bar. contractor inquiries. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence of revisions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.35 Select the patio divider wall. 37 Optionally. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. For example. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. In general. If you select By Sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revision is locked and issued to the field. under Floor Plans. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 7 Under Visible. click Revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. When Issued is selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Using the table. yet as concise as possible. 5 For Description. Setting Up a Revision Table | 603 . If Visible is not selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 2 On the Settings menu. double-click Level 4.rvt. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. if the active revision is number 1. enter a date. 3 In the Revisions dialog.use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. In most instances. When you use this option. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 5 Select the partition. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 604 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . Revision clouds have read-only properties. you make changes to the project floor plan.8 Click OK. including revision number and revision date. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 Select the divider. double-click Level 4. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. move the cursor up. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. click (Move).

6 On the Design Bar. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 8 In the drawing area. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. Sketching Revision Clouds | 605 . click Finish Sketch. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar.

14 In the Object Styles dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. 16 Click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Line Weight. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. double-click Level 4. click Tag ➤ By Category. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. select 6.rvt. you load a revision tag into the project. under Floor Plans. 606 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. click the Annotation Objects tab. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. click Tags. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. click OK. and because the revision is the first in the project. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Training Files. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.4 On the Options Bar. the cloud is tagged as number 1. You do this by issuing the revision. double-click A107 . 11 Click to place the tag. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 In the drawing area. select Leader. 6 Click Load. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Because you chose to number by project. you prevent further changes to the revision. Working with Revisions | 607 . 8 In the Tags dialog. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.rvt. You then issue a revision. you create additional revisions in the revision table. In the Tags dialog. on which you place a revised view. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Working with Revisions In this exercise. scroll down to Revision Clouds. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.rfa. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. you need to add one.Unnamed. 5 In the Tags dialog. you create a sheet view in your project. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. under Sheets.

nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. you can no longer modify it. click Revisions. On the Settings menu. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and click OK. You can continue to add revisions. click New. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. 6 In the Revisions dialog. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. select None for each issued revision.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. under Add. NOTE After you issue a revision. select Issued. for Visible. click Revisions. 608 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .

click Training Files. into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you learn to import information from other applications.9 Click OK. and place it on a sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.JPG. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets. Importing from Other Applications | 609 . Importing Image Files In this exercise.Title Sheet. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and spreadsheets. such as images. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. text.

4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click T . Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click to add text without a leader.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rvt. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 610 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Select the text. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar. under Sheets. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Text.doc text file in another window. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. for Leader.

3 In Microsoft Excel. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. This step has been completed for you. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 7 In the Revit MEP window. with the new text box still selected.mdi. and saved as Fixture Schedule. under Sheets. enter Fixture Schedule. click Modify. double-click A102 . for File name. 4 Under Printer.JPG. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit MEP. for Name. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. This process may vary from system to system. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. click File menu ➤ Print. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Importing Spreadsheets | 611 . 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Desktop. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format.JPG. and click Save.xls. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. click Modify. select the document writer.Unit 18. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format.

612 | Chapter 10 Finishing the Sheets .12 Click File menu ➤ Save.

you break up the plan into sections. The large floor plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. 613 . or footprint. called dependent views. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 11 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building.

614 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 615 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Project Browser.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 2 In the Project Browser.Aviary.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. double-click Level 2. for Name. under Level 2. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 616 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and click OK. right-click Level 2. The dependent view opens. click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area. 4 In the Rename View dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 617 .The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and the model crop is the interior crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

10 On the Zoom flyout. 13 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2. click (Hide Crop Region).Labs. 618 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). and on the Zoom flyout. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.9 On the View Control Bar. for Name. and click OK. and click Rename. 14 Click in the drawing area. 15 Select the crop region. enter Level 2 . 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Zoom To Fit.

Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Zoom flyout. click (Hide Crop Region). 19 On the View Control Bar. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 619 . click Matchline. under Floor Plans. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify.

Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. and click. 620 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.

27 Under Matchline. and drag it onto the sheet. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. expand Sheets. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 For Line Pattern. select Double Dash. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. select 9. click Level 2 . click OK to accept the default titleblock. enter Level 2 Aviary. for Name.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight.Unnamed. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 621 . and click OK. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. click the Annotation Objects tab. right-click A101 . 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.Aviary.

39 On the Options Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2.Labs dependent view on the sheet.35 On the Design Bar.Aviary is selected. and place the Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. for Target view. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 622 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click View Reference.

under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. for Target view.Aviary. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 47 On the View Control Bar. 46 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar. click (Show Crop Region). double-click Level 2 .The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.Labs. 45 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 623 . click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar.

right-click. 624 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click the far right control. after modifying the annotation crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.48 Select the crop region. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 49 If. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.

but are not placed on sheets. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 625 .51 On the View Control Bar. select all views in the list. under Floor Plans. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 57 On the Zoom flyout. expand Level 1. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click Zoom To Fit. click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and click Apply Dependent Views. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 54 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 53 In the Select Views dialog. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. right-click Level 2. click (Hide Crop Region). 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser.

right-click South Elevation. The dependent view opens. enter South Elevation . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation. expand South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Left. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. select the Crop Region. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 5 In the drawing area.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. 3 In the Project Browser. for Name. 626 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . The matchline is already placed in the view. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.

right-click A103 Unnamed. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter South Elevation . enter South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). 13 On the View Control Bar. for Name. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. under Sheets. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 627 .6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 16 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. for Name.Right. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the view.

Left. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.Left is selected. and drag it onto the sheet. and drag it onto the sheet. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser. click View Reference. click South Elevation . under Elevations. for Target view.Right. double-click South Elevation. verify that Elevation: South Elevation . under Elevations. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. click South Elevation . 628 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views .18 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 22 On the Design Bar.

30 On the Design Bar. double-click A103 . 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. for Target view.28 On the Options Bar. click Modify.South Elevation. 31 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 629 . select Elevation: South Elevation . under Sheets (all).Right.

you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Select the crop region.NOTE If the view references are not visible. 630 | Chapter 11 Using Dependent Views . and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. Right-click the view. and click Activate View.

Viewing and Rendering 3 631 .

632 | Chapter 12 Viewing and Rendering .

633 . you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. how to control fill pattern colors. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. More specifically.Viewing 12 In this tutorial.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Standard toolbar. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. click Training Files. You create elevations. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you learn how to access different views of the building model. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. including elevation and three-dimensional views. expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. 634 | Chapter 12 Viewing . sections. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. locate the Project Browser. and double-click East. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. expand Elevations. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. and three-dimensional (3D) views. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. click . A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views.

click Model Graphics Style. 7 Click OK. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. scroll down and clear Window Tags. The default name of the view is {3D}. click Visibility/Graphics. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. This change is applied only to the active view. 6 Under Visibility. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. click . This change is applied only in this elevation view. and click Hidden Line. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. Exploring the Building Model | 635 .Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. the east elevation. click the Annotation Categories tab.

and expand 3D Views. right-click {3D}.9 On the View toolbar. and click OK. and click Rename. double-click My 3D View. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. Move the mouse to pan the view. 18 In the Project Browser. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 636 | Chapter 12 Viewing . expand Views (all). enter My 3D View. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under 3D Views. . The view follows the movement of the cursor. 16 In the Rename View dialog. click X to close the view. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. You can pan. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. . you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. zoom. click to reorient the view. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel.

the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Cameras define the eye point. and click View. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 637. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Camera. and double-click Level 1. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. outside of the dimension lines. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you specify the second point (the view target). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and distance from the target. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 637 . expand Floor Plans. eye height. m_Viewing_Exercise. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. as shown in the following illustration.

4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. and sideways to see how the view changes. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 5 On the View menu. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. down. Press and hold the left mouse button. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Move the cursor up. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Dynamically Modify View. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. 638 | Chapter 12 Viewing . select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out.

height. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 13 On the View menu. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 639 . Four views of the model display in the drawing area. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Tile. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. and target 12 On the Window menu.

double-click Level 1. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 640 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 16 In the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. 15 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1.

17 In My 3D View. click Model Graphics Style. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. 20 On the View Control Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. under Camera. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. and click Element Properties. Click OK. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and click Shading. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. and move it to another location. right-click. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 641 . click to create a new 3D view. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View.

select Section Box. and click OK.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. 22 On the View menu. click View Properties. 642 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. under Extents. as shown in the following illustration. 24 Click the section box. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. A section box is displayed around the model.

27 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and maximize this view.rvt. Creating a Section View | 643 . “Creating a Section View” on page 643. and rotate the section box around the model. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Section View In this exercise. double-click Level 1. click Section. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. m_Viewing_Exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

expand Sections. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 7 In the Go To View dialog. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 8 Select the section line. View the section 5 To view the section. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click Open View. 6 In the Project Browser. select the section view. 644 | Chapter 12 Viewing . click Modify. or in the Project Browser. right-click. double-click the section head.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and double-click Section 1. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. and click Find Referring Views. 4 On the Design Bar. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.

Notice the change in the view direction. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. click Modify. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. double-click Level 1. m_Viewing_Exercise. Notice the change in section depth. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Select the section line. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 645. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.9 On the Design Bar. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor around the building model. Creating Elevation Views | 645 .rvt. click Elevation. double-click Level 1. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise.

9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . 646 | Chapter 12 Viewing . and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. zoom in. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 5 On the Design Bar.b. Elevation 1 . double-click Level 1. click Modify. under Elevations.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance.b. 10 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.a by default. and click. Do not select the arrow. Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create.a. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. double-click Elevation 1 .

rvt. click Save As. a shade of gray. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. and save the exercise file with a unique name. where each layer is assigned a different material. and open Common\c_Showroom. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and applies to phasing override materials as well. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and the insulation color to pink. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in this case. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the File menu. and other families. such as Brick on CMU. For example. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 647 . you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. click Training Files. floors. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson.11 If you want to save your changes. in a compound wall. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. This includes walls. In addition. such as the one below. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. roofs. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials.

click Color. 4 Under Cut Pattern. expand Views (all).Brick for Name. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. click Materials. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. expand 3D Views. 2 On the Settings menu. and click OK twice. select red. select Masonry . The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. expand Views (all). View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. The surface pattern of the brick is black. expand Sections (Section Head . 3 In the Materials dialog. select Masonry .Brick for Name. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. 9 In the Materials dialog. 5 In the Color dialog. and double-click 3D. 648 | Chapter 12 Viewing .Filled).Level 3. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . click Materials. Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.

3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 649. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Showroom. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. expand Views (all). The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. click Color. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type.10 Under Surface Pattern. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. and double-click Level 1. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 649 . View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. 2 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. select white.rvt. and click OK twice. click View Properties. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. 11 In the Color dialog.

15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK three times. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 7 In the Color dialog. right-click. select a shade of gray. 12 On the View Control Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. on the File menu. click Detail Level. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. and click Element Properties. . select Solid fill for Name. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Save As. double-click Level 2. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. By default. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. and click Fine.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. 10 On the Design Bar. If you create more than one plan region in a file. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. although they may have 650 | Chapter 12 Viewing . 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. click Modify. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. line type. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. or pattern. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit MEP. line color.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit MEP files. and you cannot control their visibility. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. refer to the online Help for more information. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model.coincident edges. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 651 . and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. click Training Files.

On the Options Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. and the view depth plane. 3 In the Level 1 view. the south elevation is also displayed. click Plan Region. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. and double-click Level 1. which is similar to the view range for plan views. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 652 | Chapter 12 Viewing . expand Views (all). sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. In the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. and click View. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. Plan regions have a single property. click . click Lines. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. view range. right-click in the Design Bar.

4 Select the plan region. click Modify. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.■ ■ On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. under Extents. top and bottom clip planes. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. right-click. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. Press ESC to end the command. click Edit for View Range. click Finish Sketch. 8 Click Apply. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. 6 In the View Range dialog. and click Element Properties. the line turns red. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. When you select the plan region. By selecting Parent View’s Level. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 653 . 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. and then click OK twice.

click Save As. 654 | Chapter 12 Viewing . on the File menu. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 If you want to save your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 13 In this tutorial. to place and render decals to create signs. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. billboards. and posters. 655 . you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit MEP 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit MEP that is used to produce rendered views.

Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. 656 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you select a scene that defines the model environment. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. After you create the perspective view. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. the floor. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. In this exercise. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. When you complete these changes. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model.

rvt. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. and click the tab in the context menu. select Masonry .Cavity Wall . and click Edit/New. under Construction.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Wall.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Co-house . View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click Training Files. 2 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 657 . click Materials. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Brick. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . 9 Under AccuRender. 8 In the Materials dialog. under Name. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar.Brick. click Edit for Structure. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .

Running. under Name. 11 Under Name. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 22 In the New Material dialog. select Carib. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. click Edit/New. Polished and click OK. click Duplicate. click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. click Materials. 24 In the Material Library. and click Aluminum. 23 Under AccuRender. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog.Plain. 27 On the Design Bar. for Layer 2. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 26 Click OK twice. under _accurender. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. . 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. under Construction.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 19 Click OK four times. and click . 21 In the Materials dialog. click Edit for Structure. 25 Under Name.Asphalt. expand Metals. enter Aluminum. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. under _accurender. 658 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Site .200mm. expand Masonry and click Brick. select Polished. 18 In the Materials dialog. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 14 On the Options Bar. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. under Name.

31 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click . floor. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. select Exterior under Type. click No. click in the Material field. verify that New is selected. and click OK. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. 29 On the Options Bar. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 659 . select the curtain wall mullion again. click . select Aluminum. under Name. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. click Region Raytrace. Polished. 32 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 33 Click OK three times.

Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Cnst. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 1st Flr. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. you place two different types of trees on the building site. 38 On the Design Bar.rvt. In a later exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). producing a photorealistic effect. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. 660 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 660. when you render an exterior view of the model.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. floor.

and click to place a tree.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .9 Meters. Adding Trees to the Site | 661 . right-click in the Design Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. select M_Tree . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. Create a new type of tree. and click Site. and click . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. click Site Component. 7 In the Type Selector. select any of the deciduous trees. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. 4 In the Type Selector. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click Modify. and click Site Component. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 13 Under Name. click Edit/New.rvt. and then click display the Plant Library. as shown in the following illustration. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 662. under accurender. 662 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Identity Data. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse. expand Trees and Shrubs. enter Black Oak. Black. select Black Oak for Type Comments. under Other. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. and click Deciduous. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. and click OK. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. and place two black oak trees. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. and click OK. 12 In the Plant Library. 16 Move the cursor to the building site.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 Under Other. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Oak. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 In the Name dialog. click in the Value field for Plant Name. click Duplicate.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. view open.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Creating a Perspective View | 663 . Cnst. on the View tab of the Design Bar. The new perspective view is displayed. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. click Camera.

5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 664 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Show Camera. expand 3D Views. Cnst. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. view. double-click 1st Flr. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.

rvt. under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 665. lighting. enter Exterior. you select a scene and specify time. and click Rename. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 665 . 8 In the Rename View dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. date. right-click 3D View 1. double-click Exterior. place. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and environment settings that you use to render the view. m_Cohouse. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.

5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 6 Select By Date.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 7 Under Date. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Time. click the Solar Angles tab. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 666 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Scene Settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. and click Sun. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Settings. 8 Under Time.

select Autumn for Plant Season. and click OK. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. click Site. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under Background Color. select Grass. 16 In the Environment dialog. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 20 In the Name list. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 667 .20 for Cloudiness. 11 Scroll down. 18 Click Material. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. select Ground Plane. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. USA. and select Boston. under Scene Settings. 19 In the Material Library.00 (many clouds. 17 Under Advanced.) 14 Click OK. select Good for Quality. click Capture Rendering. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. MA. click Image Size. 13 Enter . 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 21 Click OK twice.9 Click the Place tab. and enter bo. under Scene Settings. 27 On the Options Bar. The Ground Plane tab displays. 10 Click in the Cities list. and click OK. Dark. click Environment. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 26 On the Design Bar. under _accurender. click No. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. click . 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. click Raytrace. Rye.

RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. 668 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. m_Cohouse. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. expand Renderings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and finally. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. To create the rendered scene.30 On the Design Bar.rvt. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 668. Adding RPC People In this exercise. define the view and render scene settings. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 32 If you want to save this exercise. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. on the File menu. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Save As. and double-click 2nd Flr.

3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. click Component.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). select Rotate after placement. Adding RPC People | 669 .2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 4 In the Type Selector.

m_Cohouse. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 670 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .8 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 670. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

Cnst. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view.■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 671 . The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr.

right-click 3D View 1. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter 229 mm for Width. 672 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter 178 mm for Height. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. click the dimensions for Size. and click Rename.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Size. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. enter Interior. 14 On the Design Bar. click to display the 3D view of the building model. Grips are displayed on the section box. click View Properties. 11 On the View menu. select Section Box. click Modify. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. under Extents. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. A section box is displayed around the building model. and select the section box. and click OK. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 673 .9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 12 On the View menu.

click Settings. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. under 3D Views. 11 Click in the Cities list. date. m_Cohouse. 4 Under Type. and select Boston. under Scene Settings. select Interior. 7 Select By Date. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Click the Place tab. MA. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Solar Angles tab. and click Save. and click Sun. 17 In the Environment dialog. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 674. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. on the Main tab. you create a render scene to specify the time. USA. 9 Under Time. 14 Click Save. 13 Click the Settings tab. By limiting the geometry. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. click OK. and click OK.rvt. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 8 Under Date. Time. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. you reduce the rendering time.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and environment settings used to render the view. and enter bo. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 674 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Background Color. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. place. click Environment. 12 Scroll down. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. select New.

such as windows and doors. Dark.rvt. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. You can select families with transparent materials. select {3D}. under accurender. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. m_Cohouse. click OK. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Use View’s Section Box. double-click {3D}. 20 In the Material Library. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Under Scene Settings. click Daylights. 21 In the Name list. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 675 . as daylight sources. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. click Radiate. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Rye. Curtain Wall 1). 19 Click Material. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. click Site. The Ground Plane tab displays. select Summer for Plant Season. double-click Interior. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 675. select Ground Plane. select Grass.18 Under Advanced. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

. click Raytrace. 676 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Save As. 7 On the Design Bar.The radiosity process. which can take several minutes. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. and save the exercise file with a unique name. When radiate completes. begins. on the File menu. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. the following rendered view is displayed. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. 9 If you want to save your changes. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Close the exercise file. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. you rendered an exterior and an interior view.

and ends in the far corner of the living room. In a plan view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. proceeds through the dining room. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit MEP 2008. you must select or define a scene. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. or section view.rvt. If you prefer to use Metric values. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 677 . elevation.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit MEP software. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. click Settings ➤ Project Units. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and change unit formats as desired. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.

click Walkthrough. and double-click 1st Floor. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. of the walkthrough. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. click . and click to specify the start point. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu. 678 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all). expand Walkthroughs. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Floor Plans. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). or the first key frame. right-click in the Design Bar. on the Options Bar.

9 On the Options Bar. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 679 . The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. If it is not. 13 On the Options Bar. verify Field of view is selected. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 11 Under Change. and select the crop boundary. 14 Click . click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 12 On the View menu. and click OK.The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. select the crop boundary.

17 Click . clear Far Clip Active. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). c_Townhouse.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. click . 2 On the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The walkthrough plays. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. 680 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. double-click 1st Floor. enter 1 for Frame. proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the Options Bar. press ESC. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 680. under Extents.

select Path for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 681 . 6 On the Options Bar.The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

and then click to play the walkthrough. or with AccuRender raytracing. 2 In the Save As dialog. c_Townhouse. 4 Under Format. hidden line. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and click OK. When you export the walkthrough. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. click Edit Walkthrough. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. The AVI is recorded. 682 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. without opening Revit MEP 2008. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 682. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 9 On the Options Bar. If you are unsure of what option to use. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 3 Under Output Length. and click Save. under Walkthroughs. shaded. select <Shading> for Display mode. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. 1 On the File menu. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.7 Click the third key frame position. shaded with edges.

Recording the Walkthrough | 683 . then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. click Save As. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. reducing the size of the image. 8 If you want to save this exercise. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. specifying the number of frames.7 Try creating other walkthroughs.

684 | Chapter 13 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.Creating Solar Studies 14 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. More specifically. In this tutorial. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. 685 . you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year.

686 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and double-click 01 Entry. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. click Training Files. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. as shown. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. click Camera. expand Views (all). ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.rvt.Courtyard View In this exercise. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. A 3D view is created. expand Floor Plans.

“Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 687. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. 10 On the File menu.4 On the View toolbar. you create a section cutaway view. double-click 01 Entry. click Save As. enter Solar Study . and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and click OK.Courtyard View. expand 3D Views. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. as shown. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 687 . click Modify. if necessary. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. 9 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. click to reorient the view. as shown.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Proceed to the next exercise.

Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. click . enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click OK. 688 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click Rename. expand Sections. 7 In the Project Browser. to reorient the view. right-click Section 1.3 On the Design Bar. 6 To view the section. click Section. 5 On the Design Bar. click 10 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click the section head. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click Modify.

enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 689 . “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 689. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. then select Medium. click Modify. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. including the house. click Callout. and click Rename. 13 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. click Save. 17 To hide the section box. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and click OK. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and under Orient to a View. Typical plan views. to expand the dialog. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 18 On the File menu. do not display many elements in 3D.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. clear Section Boxes. 14 In the Project Browser. In some cases. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. double-click 01 Entry. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 16 On the View Control Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. then Fine. On the Annotation Categories tab. right-click {3D}. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. and click OK. you create a plan cutaway view. under 3D Views.

5 In the Project Browser. click 8 On the View toolbar. 690 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click Rename. 11 On the Design Bar. click . select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.4 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. and click OK. click Modify. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. and under Orient to a View. to reorient the view. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog.

right-click {3D}. and click OK. so you can see into the building from the top. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 16 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . 19 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 691 .15 Select the Roof. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Save. and click Rename. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the File menu.

enter Summer Solstice. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Click the Single-Day tab. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. date. and click Duplicate. Creating Solar Studies . For the Multi-Day solar study. leave the slider at 50. you specify the location.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. click . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 10 Under Place. USA is selected. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. you specify the location. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 2 On the View Control Bar. for City. 3 Select Cast Shadows. and double-click Solar Study . CA. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 692 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 9 In the Name dialog. date range. . 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . expand 3D Views. single-day. MA. and time range. For the Single-Day solar study. and click OK. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Los Angeles. USA.Courtyard View. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. click . and click OK. For this study. You can create a still. select Los Angeles. or multi-day solar study. and time.Boston.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. expand Views (all). 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.

click To display the next key frame. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click Save. Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. and click Duplicate. for Date.Courtyard View is currently displayed. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. click . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. 14 In this case. click . click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 2 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. ■ For Time Interval. enter Winter Solstice. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. select June 22. select Winter Solstice. enter 10 and press ENTER. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. 2006. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 693 . under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. . confirm that Summer Solstice. select December 22. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 693. under Frame. 19 On the File menu. 2006. click . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles is selected. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. For Time Range. enter 20 and press ENTER. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. on the Single-Day tab. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected.

showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. double-click 01 Entry. under Sun and Shadows Settings.■ To display the next sequential frame. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 694 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click . approximately as shown. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click To play the animation from start to finish.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. . ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The solar study animation plays. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Los Angeles. click . approximately as shown. under Floor Plans. Click outside of the text box to end the command. select Summer Solstice. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click . Click and enter Dining. click Text. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

expand 3D Views. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. and click OK. select Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. Exporting the Study as AVI | 695 . 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 11 To display the section box.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Lines. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. as shown. click . as shown. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. On the Options Bar. select Summer Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click . click OK. 6 On the View Control Bar.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select the section box. For Save as type. 696 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . verify that the value is set to 15.12 In the drawing area. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . For File name. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For Dimensions. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. Under Format. verify that Hidden Line is selected. On the Annotation Categories tab. as shown. 15 To hide the section box. and enter 5 to 50. 14 Click outside of the section box. For Frames per second. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. select AVI Files. enter 450 in the first field (width). Under Output Length. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. select Frame range. if necessary. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. clear Section Boxes. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. To maintain the proportions of the frame.Los Angeles.

and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. and click OK. Los Angeles. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Save As dialog. TIFF. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. For Save as type.Los Angeles. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. NOTE When you export to PNG. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for Compressor. select Winter Solstice. select Frame range. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. 20 On the File menu. depending on the Frame Range. click OK. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. For Frames per second. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. Under Output Length. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. In this example. for Model Graphics Style. BMP. or any single-frame format. of the animation separately. select PNG.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. on the Single-Day tab. Under Format. click Save. click . For Dimensions. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 697 . enter 450 in the first field (width). the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. and enter 5 to 10. or frame.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. or GIF. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . you open each image. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 697. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. verify that the value is set to 15. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. To view the animation. For File name. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. such as JPEG. verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Save.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under 3D Views. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.9 On the File menu. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 698 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day.

click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 699 . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. as shown. 5 Select the roof. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. and on the View Control Bar.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 On the File menu. for File name enter 2pm . for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.Boston. USA. clear Section Boxes. 12 In the Name dialog. under Sun and Shadows Settings. MA. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. specify 2:00 pm. select One week. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. and click Duplicate. In the Save As dialog. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click Save. 17 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. For Time Interval. and click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. click the Multi-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Los Angeles . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). For Time. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. and click OK. 700 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Click the Desktop icon. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click Save. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . On the Annotation Categories tab. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. for Compressor. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.Week Interval. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.

so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. Orienting to True North | 701 . select Summer Solstice. 9 Under Date and Time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. on the Still tab. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. Then. specify 11:00 AM for time. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . For example. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . In this exercise. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click the Still tab. and click OK. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 11 Under Date and Time. select Cast Shadows. click . and click OK. click Apply. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings.

NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. click OK. and click OK. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. click the Still tab. 702 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . click . On the Options Bar. in the Angle from Project to True North field. click OK. and select Winter Solstice. under Floor Plans. select True North. Notice that the project rotates in the view. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and select View Properties. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Graphics. In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. for Orientation. 13 On the View Control Bar. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser.

22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . Los Angeles. click Summer Solstice. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Still tab. For Save as type. and click Apply. click OK. for File name. under 3D Views. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. are saved with the project. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. including the angle from True North. In the Save As dialog. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that AVI Files is selected. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. click the Single-Day tab. 21 On the View Control Bar. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Orienting to True North | 703 .

double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. 28 Once you are finished with the study. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. capturing it. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. On the Options Bar. 29 On the File menu. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 704 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies . and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. for Compressor. under Graphics. In this exercise. click GO. and select View Properties. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655 for additional information on rendering. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Draft (75 dpi). Right-click in the drawing area. click Raytrace. Since a rendered image is temporary.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Project North. and click Save. for Dimensions. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 1 In the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Rendered views do not have this limitation. enter 600 in the first field. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. under 3D Views. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. for Orientation. On the Options Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. click Save. for Resolution. and click OK. Click the Desktop icon.■ Under Format. for Scene. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser.

click Save. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 5 On the Design Bar. The scene is rendered in high resolution. for Save as Type. click Export Image. click GO. click Capture Rendering. In the Save As dialog. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. select Presentation (300 dpi). for Resolution. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. under Renderings. 7 Review some captured images of the building. select JPEG. In the Project Browser. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. Rendering an Interior View | 705 . and click Save.■ ■ On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar.

706 | Chapter 14 Creating Solar Studies .

For the realistic approach. sections. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. there are several options for expressing the architecture. Advanced Model Graphics. To express texture beyond material specifics. A majority of tools in Revit MEP 2008 are intended to describe number.Presentation Views 15 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. length. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit MEP can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 655. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and details. elevations. an outside reviewer. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. Whether the audience is the general contractor. In this series of exercises. the Linework Tool. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. type. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. or the client. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 707 . The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views." In Revit MEP. a consultant." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. and Section Boxes. you explore the stylistic approach.

Using the pre-built building model. Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. 708 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

click Training Files. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 709 . you create a presentation floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click 2nd Flr.rvt. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

elevations. and click Rename. and clear DOWN Text. Up Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab. Down Arrow. click Visibility/Graphics. 10 On the File menu. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 7 Under Visibility. exit the menu. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. this represents the view getting smaller. click in the drawing area. 3 In the Rename View dialog. sections. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click Save As. dimensions. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. expand the Stairs category. Cnst. This turns off the visibility of all tags. Notice that no annotations display in this view. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. under Floor Plans. and click OK. UP Text. 710 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click the Scale control and select 1:100. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 8 Click OK. and so on in this view.2 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Time and Place. and click OK. navigate to the folder of your choice. The higher the number. Within a Project. select Cast Shadows. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 5 Under Settings. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. 2 On the View Control Bar. click for Place. click . the darker the shadows. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select By Date. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. USA for City. and click Advanced Model Graphics. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 711. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 711 . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Save. click the Place tab. At that place. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. MA. 8 Select Boston. modify. 6 Under Settings. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. select Sun and Shadow Settings. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. double-click it in the Project Browser.11 In the Save As directory. specify 35 for Shadow. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view.rvt. on the Still tab. you can create. Under Shadows Properties. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. ■ Under Intensity.

and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 Click OK. click Save. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. and select 1st Flr. 17 On the File menu. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 712 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . you can enter any city you wish. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. however.NOTE For this step. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 713. clear Ground Plane at Level. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . click OK. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Cnst. under Settings. be aware that if you enter a different city. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level.

and click OK. right-click the Design Bar. and click to place it. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click Add View to Sheet. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 713 . The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. click Add View. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. TIP If the View tab is not available. 4 In the Views dialog. and notice a view title displays. and click View.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise.

you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click Activate View. 714 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. under Graphics.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. For this analytique. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Presentation. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select No for Show Title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click . Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. and click OK.

and the boundary of the region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. enter Solid Black. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click . 22 On the Design Bar.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click . you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. for Fill Pattern. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. and select Chain. 18 On the Options Bar. When you are finished drawing the chain. 20 On the Options Bar. If necessary. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. click Filled Region. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 715 . select Invisible Lines. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click . 24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 25 In the Name dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. fill properties. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 17 In the Type Selector. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. under Graphics.

you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 716. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. under Name. 716 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . select Solid Fill. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. click OK. click Save. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. 34 On the File menu. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Identity Data. scroll down. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 30 On the Design Bar. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Visibility/Graphics. and clear Elevation Swing. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. on the Model Categories tab. and click OK. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 717 . exit the menu. expand the Doors category. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Rename. under Elevations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Pattern Overrides. scroll up. right-click South. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter Presentation South Elevation. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. right-click Copy of South. expand Elevations. under Visibility. click in the drawing area. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. clear Visible. 9 Click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Override. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. click in the Walls row. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

By changing the angle of the sun. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 13 Under Intensity. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. click Save. Time and Place. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. select By Date. 718 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Duplicate. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Under Shadow Properties. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 20 On the File menu. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. under Settings. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 16 In the Name dialog. click OK. select Cast Shadows. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 718. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. click .

expand Sheets (all).rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Notice the viewport displays a view title. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 719 . TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. click Add View. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. under Views (all). and double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 720 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. Notice the view title no longer displays. select Viewport: Presentation.

“Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 721. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 721 . you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. click Save. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.8 On the File menu. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.

Section 2 is added to the building model. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 2. and use the flip arrows if necessary. select 1: 100 for Scale. click Section.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). Cnst. 722 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add the section shown below. To accomplish this. To fit correctly in the analytique. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees.

Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. click Modify. clear Visible. click Override. and click OK. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click the Model Categories tab. click Callout. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 723 . right-click Callout of Section 2.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Sections (Callout 1). This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click Rename. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Presentation Section 2. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 15 Under Visibility. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click in the Walls row. select 1 : 100 for Scale. under Pattern Overrides. 11 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser.

Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. 20 Click OK. expand the Doors category. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Revit MEP displays 2 boundaries. and click OK. scroll up. click . clear Crop Region Visible. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. clear Annotation Crop.17 Under Visibility. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. and clear Elevation Swing. When you select the crop boundary. 724 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 725 . click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties. In addition. Under Intensity. open the Project Browser and. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 725. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. under Sections (Callout 1). specify 35 for Shadow. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Click Apply. double-click Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view.24 On the File menu. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise.

under Silhouette Edges. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under Settings. NOTE The line style. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click Save. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 726 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . was added to this dataset for training purposes. click Duplicate. and click OK. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Silhouette Edges. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.In the steps that follow. select Override Silhouettes. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 727. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 11 On the File menu. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 5 In the Name dialog. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. select Directly. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. select Relative to View. click .

6 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Views dialog.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 727 . and click Add View to Sheet.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. The view title no longer displays. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . click Add View. click Modify. 5 In the Type Selector. and click to place the selected view. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Viewport: Presentation. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

you click to specify the start radius. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. In the steps that follow. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. and press ENTER. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. Using a clock as a reference. To rotate an object. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 728 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 On the Edit toolbar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. click . Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. double-click Section 2.

Presentation. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 729 . Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. the callout rotates 180 degrees. under Sheets (all).

15 On the Design Bar. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 730. double-click Presentation Section 2. After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the View Templates dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View menu. click Save. click Create View Template from View. click OK. 730 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.rvt. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 16 On the File menu. enter Presentation.

Now. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Apply View Template. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select Presentation. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View menu. under Sections (Type 1). under Sheets (all). and elevation swings no longer display. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Activate View. right-click Section 1. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 1. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sections (Type 1). annotations. and click Rename. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click Copy of Section 1. and click OK. click Add View. Notice the furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. Working with a Presentation View Template | 731 . 6 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . and click OK. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser.Presentation. lighting fixtures. click View Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Presentation Section 1. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. select Viewport: Presentation.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. traditional analytiques contain a detail. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 732. 18 Right-click the viewport. click Save. such as a tracery window or column capital. 732 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. under Graphics. and click OK. In this exercise. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. 20 On the File menu. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Section 1. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout. Working in a Callout Analytique | 733 . and click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Project Browser. click Callout. select the callout. After you add the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Type 1).

and click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. under Extents. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Annotation Crop. 734 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. 8 Right-click.

click Modify. under Sheets (all). select Custom for View Scale. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. click View Properties. Working in a Callout Analytique | 735 . 12 In the Views dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. and move it into the position shown below. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. double-click A105 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. select Section: Presentation Callout.Presentation. 17 On the View menu. click Add View. and click Deactivate View. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.

select Solid Black for Type. 23 On the Design Bar. When finished. activate the viewport. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Filled Region. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and make adjustments as necessary. In the steps that follow. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. under Sections (Callout 1). Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. double-click Presentation Callout. click Region Properties. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 736 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet.

26 On the Project Browser. 29 On the Options Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below.Presentation. and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 737 . double-click A105 . click . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Filled Region.

and click OK. 33 Select the crop region. under Extents. 738 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . click View Properties. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. 31 On the View menu. click Finish Sketch. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible.30 On the Design Bar.

You then add each view to the presentation sheet. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 739 . 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and apply shadows to the views. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click Save. and click Deactivate View. 37 On the File menu. under Extents.34 On the View menu. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click View Properties. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 739. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. clear Crop Region Visible. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways.

740 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . Under Shadows Properties. click .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. specify 35 for Shadow. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.rvt. click Duplicate. and click 1 : 200. select Cast Shadows. click the Scale control. 7 In the Name dialog. Under Intensity. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Orient ➤ Southwest. double-click Isometric. under 3D Views. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

under 3D Views. under Settings. select Section Box. and click Rename. under 3D Views. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 13 In the Rename View dialog. Select 1st Flr. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. Select Ground Plane at Level. under Extents. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 2. and click Rename. click View Properties. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 741 . 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 2. enter Isometric 1. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. right-click Isometric 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Cnst.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 18 On the View menu. 9 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. right-click Isometric. and click OK. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. 15 In the Project Browser. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. in the list. Select Relative to View. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK.

click Modify on the Design Bar. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. 23 In the Project Browser. You can use this to rotate the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. right-click Isometric 2.20 Select the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 742 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. and click Rename. make a duplicate of the view. under 3D Views. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. When you are finished.

24 In the Rename View dialog. double-click A105 . double-click Isometric 3. and click OK. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. Next. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 743 .Presentation. In such a case. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. double-click Isometric 2. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. clear Section Boxes. under Sheets (all). the stairs and railings may display. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 26 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 3. either adjust the plane location. and click OK. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Notice the section box no longer displays. clear Section Boxes. select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. 25 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector. 34 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 31 To hide the section box. 29 Select the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

35 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. 744 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 36 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.

41 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. and click Deactivate View. 47 On the Design Bar. The image below shows the lines redrawn. under Graphics. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. select Concrete for Type. click Finish Sketch. 44 Using the drawing tools. and click Activate View.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 42 Click OK twice. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 45 On the Design Bar. click Edit. 38 Select the poche filled region. and then click Edit/New. click Region Properties. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 43 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. select Solid Black for Type. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. click Region Properties. select Transparent for Background. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 745 .

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.49 On the File menu. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 746. 746 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .rvt. then you specify the eye direction and range. Cnst. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. click Camera. a cutaway perspective view. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. you create the final view for the analytique. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you add it to the presentation sheet. click Save.

Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 747 .The view opens immediately. specify 35 for Shadow. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click . select Cast Shadows. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Shadows Properties. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Under Intensity. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.

748 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 12 Select the section box. select Section Box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. and click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. click View Properties. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. and click OK. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under Extents. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. A section box now cuts through the building model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. Notice the controls that display on each plane.

click Size. click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. under Change. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 749 . 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. 18 To hide the crop region.Presentation. Clear Crop Region Visible. under 3D Views. 17 Under Model Crop Size. 19 To hide the section box. you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 21 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). enter 165 mm for Width. After placing it. select Scale (locked proportions). clear Section Boxes.14 Select the crop boundary. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog.

under Text. select the same font as the title. 9 In the Name dialog. 750 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views . 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. click Duplicate. enter Title. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 2 On the Options Bar. select Text : Title. specify a text size of 40 mm. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 750. click Save. select a font. and click OK. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Description. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New.rvt. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. under Text. click . Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. specify a text size of 6 mm. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.22 On the File menu. click Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

click Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Modify. Annotating the Analytique | 751 . 17 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. 18 On the File menu.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

752 | Chapter 15 Presentation Views .

Creating Families 4 753 .

754 | Chapter 16 Creating Families .

each with a different size. 755 . In this tutorial.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit MEP 2008 are “family based. material set. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. thus the term family. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit MEP to help you manage your data and make changes easily. they are still related and come from a single source. shape. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.

For example. exceptions to this rule. has wall types that define interior. and when and how to use it. In this lesson. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit MEP and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. and roofs. The basic walls system family. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. generic.rfa extension. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. In addition. Using the Family Editor. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit MEP recognize it as a particular component type. and furniture. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. trees. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Revit MEP has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit MEP and comprise principle building components such as walls. but you cannot create new system families. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. such as a dome roof. transfer them from one project to another. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. floors. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. Walls. and partition wall styles. You can load them into projects. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . while many more are stored in component libraries. Standalone families include columns. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type.rfa extension. There are. floors. foundation. 756 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . exterior.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit MEP is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. You also learn about the Family Editor. because there is only one file to track. and roofs are examples of these types of families. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. This makes file management much easier. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. however. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. for example.

In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. After the family has been loaded in the project. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Introduction to the Family Editor | 757 . so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and also a standalone furniture family component. such as plan. To add a family to your project. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. it is saved with the project. However. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. for example. you learned about the different types of Revit MEP families and when to use them. how to access it. 2 On the File menu. You create in-place families only within the current project. elevation. In the final exercise. custom wall treatments. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Load Family command on the File menu. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. or 3D.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. In this section. you learn about the Family Editor. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. and when to use it. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. if you change the original family. you can drag it into the document window.

5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 9 Save the newly-defined family. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. it should be available within the Type Selector.In this exercise. and click Open. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 3 Next.rfa extension and it will open Revit MEP in the Family Editor. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. and then load it into the project. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. modify it as needed. 758 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . presume it is a bay window that you require. When the family opens. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. With Revit MEP open. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. it opens within the Family Editor. If you find a close match. you learn when to use the Family Editor. such as newsgroups. how to access it. navigate to a family file. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. and click Open. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. To start a new family. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. In this case. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. you can click File ➤ Open. select the appropriate template. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. Within the Windows® environment. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. you can double-click any file with an . if you have exhausted your external resources. consider checking the web library and other web resources. open it in the Family Editor. 5 Finally. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template.

and several annotation families. Using the installed templates. you learn how to create specific Revit MEP 2008 families. In addition. You create a furniture family. 759 . you create it within the project file. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you learn how to create a different type of component. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. not within the Family Editor. In each lesson. When you create an in-place family. you create an in-place family. a lighting fixture.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. 760 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. height. The door type has a variable height and width. and thickness. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.

click Training Files.rft. and represent the door opening profile. click Symbolic Lines. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Labelled dimensions. 5 On the Window menu. 4 On the View menu. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Maximize the window. 10 On the Options Bar. click . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Level.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 761 . part of the door properties. 9 In the Type Selector. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. click Tile. are also displayed. Notice the four tiled views. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 2 On the File menu. select Doors [projection]. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click New ➤ Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 7 Enter ZF. Floor Plan: Ref. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown.

762 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar.

click Modify.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 19 On the Options Bar. select Width for Label. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 763 . select Thickness for Label. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. In the image below. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. along with the witness line controls. and select the command from the menu. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. click Symbolic Lines. you first specify the arc center. When drawing an arc from center and end points. as shown. 764 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 23 On the Options Bar. then you specify each end point. select Plan Swing [cut]. 22 In the Type selector. 21 On the Design Bar. 24 Enter SI. click the down arrow button.

under Elevations. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 765. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 765 . and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. double-click Exterior. click Lines. and click . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter 50 mm for Depth. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle.

9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 766 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. double-click Left. click Finish Sketch. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. 10 On the Design Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference.8 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. under Floor Plans. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 17 On the Options Bar. Level. and clear Plan/RCP. under View Specific Display. select Front/Back. and Fine are selected. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Medium. select Thickness for Label. 19 Under Detail Levels. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Left/Right. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar.12 On the Design Bar. double-click Ref. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 767 . click Modify and select the dimension. verify that Coarse. 13 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

12 In the Element Properties dialog box. It also defines its appearance when rendered. click OK. enter Oak Door for Name. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. under Name. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. select Panel for Subcategory.Red/Stained. for Material. click Modify. select Oak Door for Name. you assign a material to the door leaf. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. click Materials. for Material. 6 Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 4 In the Materials dialog box.Dark. click .20 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 768 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 768. click for Texture. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.No Gloss. 13 On the Design Bar. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. click Duplicate. click . under AccuRender. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 In the Materials dialog box. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. click . select Oak Door. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 7 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. 15 On the Options Bar.

The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. and select Shading with Edges. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. double-click View 1. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 769 . under Views (all).The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. 21 On the View Control Bar. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. click the Model Graphics Style control.

enter 125 mm for Frame Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. 770 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 3 In the Name dialog box. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. enter 2500 mm for Height. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1000 mm for Width. By flexing the new component. under Family Types. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. “Defining New Door Types” on page 770 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 24 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. 27 Click OK. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. enter 2000 mm for Height. and click OK. click Family Types. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. click New. In the Family Types dialog box. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 75 mm for Frame Width.

Click Apply. 8 Under Family Types. Define the second new door type. click New. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 15 In the New Project dialog box. Define the third new door type. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Browse. enter 2134 mm for Height. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 5 Under Family Types. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Click Apply. Enter 750 mm for Width. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. click Load. and click Open. Enter 925 mm for Width.4 In the Family Types dialog box. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 17 Under Create new. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 12 On the File menu. Training Door. under Template file. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Defining New Door Types | 771 . Training Door. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. click Door. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. select it. 11 Click OK. click New. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click Wall.rfa. Click Apply. 9 In the Name dialog box.rfa. select Project. enter 2000 mm for Height. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. click New ➤ Project. click Save. Enter 1220 mm for Width. enter 2100 mm for Height. 20 In the Open dialog box.

24 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 772 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. and select Shading with Edges. 28 In the Type Selector. click . 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Type Selector.23 On the View toolbar. click Door. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm.

you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. glazing and mullions as extrusions. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. default sill height. 32 You can close all files without saving. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. You create the window frame. and specify values for the window width. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. and mullion offset. height. Creating a Window Family | 773 . and create the window sash as a sweep. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. This completes the lesson. Creating a Door Family.30 In the Type Selector. Finally. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm.

Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. The window type has a variable height and width. also one of the window properties. The label name. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. equally spaced vertical mullions. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. 7 Enter ZF. 774 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Labelled dimensions.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 2 On the File menu. 5 On the View menu. 8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. is one of the type parameters. click New ➤ Family. click Training Files. Four views are tiled on your display. When you add labels to dimensions. you specify the parameters for the new window family. part of the window properties. 4 On the Window menu. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. are also displayed. Height and Default Sill Height. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. click Tile. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window.rft. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view.

The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. This process is called “flexing the model. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 775 . Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 775. Change the height and width values again. enter 1300 mm for Height. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. then sketching the sweep profile.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Enter 1800 mm for Width. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Click OK. Click Apply. click Family Types. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. This is the starting point for the new window. and click Apply. and click Apply.

click Lines. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. click Sketch Profile. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 776 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Snap the cursor to each corner. click Finish Path. click Sketch 2D Path. 9 On the View Control Bar. select Elevation: Right. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. and select 1:10. and click Open View.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click the Scale control. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click .

15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click . click Ref Plane. and select the dimension. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 777 . select Prefer: Wall faces. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane.The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 14 On the Design Bar.

the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . select Chain and click . under Identity Data.18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 24 Below the red dot. However. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. 778 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Sash for the Name. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select the reference plane. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. the exact dimensions are not critical. click Lines. NOTE When you sketch the frame profile.

When the lock displays. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.26 Select the right edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. When the lock displays. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 779 . click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall.

Modify each dimension if necessary. click Dimension. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame.29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and specify the dimension value. 780 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the line you want to move. as shown. TIP After adding the dimension.

click the lock to constrain the present value. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. When the lock displays. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. 35 On the Design Bar. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. expand 3D Views. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 781 . When the lock displays. under Views (all). click Finish Profile. 33 On the Tools toolbar. If necessary. 37 In the Project Browser. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. zoom out until it displays. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. this is the top of the window opening. and double-click View 1. click . click the lock to constrain the present value.Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Next.

and select Lock. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name.45 mm for Depth. and enter . 4 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 782. under Elevations. 2 On the Design Bar. and select the option. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. double-click Exterior. click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.38 In the Project Browser. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. 782 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. Chain of walls or lines.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 783 . click Finish Sketch. ■ Click .The entire sash outline is selected. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. set the following options: Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Enter .50 mm for Offset. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. 9 On the Design Bar. and lock icons display on each line.

under 3D Views. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 784. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. 784 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Right. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. The window sash extrusion is now complete. double-click View 1. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.10 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

double-click Right. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. under Elevations.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 785 . click . as shown. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.

enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click Dimension. and select Lock. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. click Lines. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. 8 Select the reference plane. click . 786 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box.5 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. and click to create the glass boundary. under Elevations. 15 On the Design Bar. enter -12 mm for Depth. under Specify a new Work Plane.

sash. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. double-click Right. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. 23 On the Design Bar. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. After the family is loaded into a project. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and click OK.18 On the Design Bar. click . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 787 . 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. View the window model with frame. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. 20 Select the glass extrusion.

make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. double-click View 1. click Family Types. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. For example. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. Under Other. NOTE After flexing the model. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. 788 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. under 3D Views. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply.24 In the Project Browser.

Click OK. Click Apply. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. enter 1000 mm for Height. the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. under Elevations. Under Other. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Enter 2000 mm for Width. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 789. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 789 . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.27 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane.

click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. as shown.4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 790 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . After adding the dimension. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.

select Family parameter. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click OK. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 791 . Select Instance. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. select <Add parameter. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. click Modify. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click Family Types.. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 11 On the Design Bar. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Click OK. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Dimensions.. Under Group parameter under. enter Mullion Offset for Name.Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. 9 On the Options Bar.

Notice the dimension value becomes editable. move the dimension value as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. 792 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Click the dimension value. 17 On the Options Bar. As you did before. click Modify. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. and enter 350 mm as the new value.

22 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. However. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Dimension.21 In the Work Plane dialog box. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. After you complete the sketch. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 793 . select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. Move the dimension values as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. and click . and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. click Lines. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash.

29 On the Design Bar. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Family parameter. 30 On the Options Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Under Parameter Data. enter Mullion Width for Name. click Modify. select <Add parameter> for Label. Under Group parameter under. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 794 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Click OK. Select Type.

Select the dimension. select Mullion Width for Label. 33 On the Design Bar. This is changed in later steps. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 795 . ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. and on the Options Bar. Remember. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. click Finish Sketch. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown.

Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 796 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. enter 1500 mm for Height. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. Under Other. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply.

Under Other. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Enter 2000 mm for Width. and aligned with the sash edge. 37 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane.NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. click . 39 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. In this case. or undoing the same. and click OK. 42 On the Options Bar. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. Click Apply. evenly spaced. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 797 . Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. Click OK. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early.

49 On the Options Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. 48 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Dimension. Move the dimension value as shown. click Modify. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. select Mullion Width for Label. Remember. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 46 On the Design Bar. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal.44 On the Design Bar. 798 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.

and select the vertical mullions. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. click Join Geometry. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 799 . select Mullion Width for Label. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch. Select the dimension.NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. and on the Options Bar.

Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. 56 On the Design Bar. If necessary. 800 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 1500 mm for Height. double-click View 1. click Family Types. under 3D Views. you can still see the window. 57 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply.54 In the Project Browser. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Under Other. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height.

Click OK. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 801. Under Other. sash. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply.58 In the Family Types dialog box. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 801 . Enter 2000 mm for Width. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. you assign materials to the frame. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. enter 1000 mm for Height. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise.

18 On the Design Bar. click . 10 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 9 Select the window frame sweep. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. the sash. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 4 In the Materials dialog box. Dark. Yellow/. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and Fine are selected. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 802 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under AccuRender. 8 On the View Control Bar. under Identity Data. select Edit for Visibility. and select Shading with Edges. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click OK. double-click Exterior. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Coarse. sash. click for Texture. under Elevations. Medium. click Materials. click the Model Graphics Style control. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. select Stained. click for Material. enter Pine Frame for Name. and click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. and click OK. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. select Pine Frame for Name. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 3 In the New Material dialog box. under View Specific Display. and click OK.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Graphics. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click Modify. and the mullions. 13 In the Materials dialog box. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. clear the other view options. 16 Under Detail Levels. No Gloss.

select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). click Visibility. 20 Select the glass extrusion. and click OK. under View Specific Display. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 25 Zoom in on a window corner. double-click Right. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. verify that Coarse. and Fine are selected. 21 On the Options Bar. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 803 .Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 23 Under Detail Levels. Medium.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. mullions. 804 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Defining New Window Types In this exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. and glass display their assigned materials.The window frame. “Defining New Window Types” on page 804. sash.

enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. enter 1000 mm for Height. Enter 1250 mm for Height. under Family Types. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. Defining New Window Types | 805 . Click Apply. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. 7 In the Name dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. click New. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. click Family Types. and click OK.Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. In the Family Types dialog box. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. The window height is doubled. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. enter 2000 mm for Height. and click Apply.

You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Click Apply.rfa file. and click OK. Enter 1300 mm for Height. Click OK. Click Apply. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. Training Window. 11 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. select it.9 Under Family Types. 806 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click to start a new project based on your default template.rfa. navigate to the location of your Training Window. click New. 15 On the File menu. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. click New. click Load. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 13 In the Name dialog box. click Save. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Open. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 10 In the Name dialog box. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. click Window. 20 In the Open dialog box.

30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 34 On the View toolbar. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Window. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. click . click Thin Lines. 24 On the Options Bar. 35 On the View Control Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. click Modify. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. Defining New Window Types | 807 . 31 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 25 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Type Selector. 32 On the View menu. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 33 Zoom in on the center window. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 23 On the Design Bar. click Wall. 29 In the Type Selector.Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. and select Shading with Edges.

Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 808 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. Finally. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. drawer base. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and drawers as extrusions. rolltop. You begin by creating the desktop. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 809 . 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes.Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. click Ref Plane. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. NOTE When you draw the reference planes.rft. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 5 On the View menu. Level. Floor Plan: Ref. their exact location is not critical. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. click Training Files. 2 On the File menu. click New ➤ Family. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 4 Maximize the view. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown.

10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar. and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. click Dimension. 810 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane.

click Dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. click Modify. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. and ending at the lower reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 811 . 13 Select the left reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area.12 On the Design Bar. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. as shown.

20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. horizontal reference plane.17 To the right of the dimension you just created. 19 Select the upper. 18 On the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. click Modify.

enter Length for Name.> for Label. 24 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. Afterwards. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 813 . select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. select <Add parameter. TIP To do this.21 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. select Family parameter. click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. For Group parameter under. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position.. select Dimensions.

Therefore. Click OK. For Group parameter under. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 27 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. select <Add parameter. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. select Family parameter.26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area.> for Label. select Dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Depth for Name. 814 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you can still see the model. Select Type..

enter 3000 mm for Length. 32 In the Family Types dialog box.31 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. it will also adapt to the same changes. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 815 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Click Apply. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Your lines may have a lighter weight. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 815. enter 2000 mm for Length. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. click Symbolic Lines. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. 2 On the Options Bar. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. NOTE In the image below. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. click . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. Click OK.

816 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 On the Design Bar. click . 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 5 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. and enter 100 mm for Depth. double-click Front. 10 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the top edge. and click to select all four symbolic lines. under Specify a new Work Plane. Level for Name.4 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Modify.

21 Select the 750 mm dimension. select <Add parameter. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 817 . click Modify.14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Height for Name. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop...> for Label. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. as shown. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. click Dimension. select Family parameter. 22 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. and select the bottom edge. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.

Enter 1200 mm for Height. Select Type. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. select <Add parameter.. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply. 27 On the Design Bar. Select Type. select Dimensions. Click OK. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. enter Thickness for Name. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply. select Dimensions. and click Apply.> for Label. Click Apply. 818 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 4000 mm for Length.■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 29 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 818. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. For Group parameter under. you can still see the model. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. Click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 2000 mm for Length. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Modify. 31 In the Family Types dialog box.

and enter 100 mm for Offset. under Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 819 . click . 2 On the Design Bar. Level. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. click Dimension.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ref. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane.

under Specify a new Work Plane. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar.7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. select Level: Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Lines. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 820 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. click . Lock the dimension as shown. Click the lock icon as shown. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 10 On the Design Bar. Level for Name.

17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension.After you complete the rectangle. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. two lock icons display. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 821 .

822 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 23 For the align-to reference. 22 On the Tools toolbar. .Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. as shown below at the cursor. using the TAB key. click the Mirror tool. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 19 Select the four sketched lines. You can also highlight the entire line chain. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. click Modify. click . TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down.

27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 823 . A lock icon displays. click Dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. Click OK. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.. Select Type. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base.■ Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. 30 On the Options Bar. 824 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .> for Label. as shown. 28 Add two final dimensions. select Family parameter. select <Add parameter.. select Dimensions. enter Drawer Base Width for Name.

double-click Front. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 825 . click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 35 On the Design Bar. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 34 On the Design Bar.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.

click Visibility/Graphics. notice that annotations display in this view. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 40 On the Design Bar. However. click . 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 826 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 45 On the View Control Bar. a lock icon displays. click it to lock the alignment. click the Scale control and select 1:20. 42 On the View menu. and click OK. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click .37 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 41 On the View toolbar. After the alignment.

Enter 750 mm for Height. and click Apply. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 827 . Click Apply. 47 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 827. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise.Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. click Family Types. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. enter 4000 mm for Length. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply. you can still see the model. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height.

as shown. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. and click to specify the upper left corner. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 2 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Right. click Lines. click . 828 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar.

9 Select the desk top. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . and lock the alignment. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. then select the right parallel sketch line. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 829 .8 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment.

16 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. . click Lines. the upper sketch line. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. and lock it. click the Fillet arc tool. 830 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .11 On the Design Bar. and lock it. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.

20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. under Elevations. select the right edge of the rolltop. click . and click the lock icon. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. 18 On the Tools toolbar. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. and click the lock icon. select the left edge of the rolltop. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 831 . double-click Front.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. If not. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. click . Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. 832 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply.21 On the View toolbar.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 833 . you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.25 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 833. and click OK. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. select Pick a Plane. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.

If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 834 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . double-click Front. There should be four dimensions as shown. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers.5 In the Project Browser. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. click Dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. zoom the view until you do. click . 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. 6 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar. click drawer set on the left. Lock each dimension as you add it. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. select Multiple Alignment. 11 On the Tools toolbar. . 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer.

click . 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 Click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar.Wood. and select Shading with Edges. click .15 On the Tools toolbar. Dark. click Modify. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. click for Texture. click the Model Graphics Style control. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. for Material. click 24 In the Materials dialog box. Polished. under AccuRender. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. click OK. Cherry. 25 In the New Material dialog box. click OK. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. and click OK. click . click Finish Sketch. and click OK. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. under Constraints. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 In the Materials dialog box. enter Desk . 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 In the Material Library dialog box. 20 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click Extrusion Properties. under Materials and Finishes. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 835 . 26 In the Materials dialog box.

click Family Types. 33 On the Design Bar. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. you can still see the model. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click Apply. 836 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. The desk should adapt to all the changes. enter 2000 mm for Length. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 836. 35 In the Family Types dialog box.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. You can also use dimension constraints. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. Click OK. and click Apply. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. If not.

select it. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar.rfa. 5 Under Family Types. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. and click OK. 8 Under Family Types. Defining New Furniture Types | 837 . 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. 9 In the Name dialog box. click 14 On the View toolbar. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. click New. Training Furniture. and click Apply. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. 3 In the Name dialog box. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. click Load. click Apply.rfa file.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 6 In the Name dialog box. 19 In the Type Selector. 15 On the View Control Bar. and click Apply. 17 On the Options Bar. under Family Types. 18 In the Open dialog box. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. click . and click OK. click New. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Open. click Save. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. and click OK. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. to start a new project based on your default template. 11 On the File menu. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. click Component. click Family Types.

21 In the Type Selector. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. and add the second desk. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. and click to add the third desk. 23 In the Type Selector. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. 838 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson.

select Ref. click New ➤ Family. Level. 9 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and double-click Ref.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Baluster | 839 . Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.rft. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. click Set Work Plane. Select Metric Baluster. their exact location is not critical. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 2 On the View menu. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Level for Name. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. expand Floor Plans. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click Open. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. However. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. Select the DefaultMetric. double-click Front. click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. 840 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open. 11 On the Design Bar. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. In the New Project Dialog box. click Modify and select the extrusion. click Stairs. 14 Click the lock icon. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. click . click New ➤ Project. 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.rfa. click Browse. click the Modelling tab. By default. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. select Training Files.rte file. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. The new custom baluster is now complete. 6 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster.7 On the File menu. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 841 . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Orient ➤ Southwest. and click Open. 10 On the View menu. click Edit/New. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.rfa file. 19 Click OK. 8 In the Open dialog box. click . click OK. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 9 On the View toolbar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the existing railing. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. click Shading with Edges. under Baluster Family. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 On the View menu. click OK. click . 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. select it.

Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. The new sweep profile is now complete. select Training Files. soffits.rft.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . click New ➤ Family. cornices. balusters. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click Lines. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. and a host sweep. In the left pane of the New dialog box. their exact location is not critical. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. However. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. you create five different profiles: a sweep. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. and click Open. Select Metric Profile. and other sweep-defined objects. you draw a sweep profile. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. a stair nosing.rfa.Sweep. you create a rail profile. a reveal. a railing. 842 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In this lesson. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Level is open. select Training Files. Dataset ■ On the File menu. verify that Ref. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Select Metric Profile-Rail. The new rail profile is now complete.rft.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 843 . and click Open. their exact location is not critical. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Family.rfa. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. click Lines. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. you create a stair nosing profile. under Floor Plans. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click New ➤ Family.Rail. However.

Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. Level is open. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. Select Metric Profile-Reveal. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Lines. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.rft.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. you create a reveal profile. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. However. 844 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Floor Plans. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. and click Open. select Training Files. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. and click Open.Stair Nosing. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click New ➤ Family. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. In addition. select Training Files. Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. verify that Ref. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs.rft. their exact location is not critical. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rfa.

In the left pane of the New dialog box.rft. select Training Files. click Lines. and click Open. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. Level is open. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. you create a host sweep profile. Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. which may be any vertical surface. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. The new reveal profile is now complete. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 845 . However.rfa. Select Metric Profile-Hosted. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. click New ➤ Family. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .Reveal. their exact location is not critical. under Floor Plans. verify that Ref. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.

and in the left pane of the New dialog box. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. their exact location is not critical. In the New Project Dialog box. click Browse. The new host sweep profile is now complete. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. However. click Lines. 2 In the New Project dialog box. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. click OK. click New ➤ Project. click Create. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.Host Sweep. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. Select the DefaultMetric. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. and click Open. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. Specify the family category 3 On the Modelling menu.rte file. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . select Training Files. 846 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rfa.

click Finish Sweep. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. 17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. click . beside Load Profiles. click Sketch 2D Path. enter Sweep for Name. select Profile . and double-click South. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 847 . and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. expand Elevations. and click Open. 11 In the Open dialog box. 5 In the Name dialog box. the exact location of the path is not critical. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Path. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 10 On the Options Bar. click Finish Family.Sweep.rfa. 15 On the View toolbar. select it. and click OK. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. navigate to the location of Profile .Sweep. click Load Profiles.4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 12 In the Type Selector. Sketch the 2D sweep path 6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). select Generic Models for Family Category. Modify the sweep profile configuration 16 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.

Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder.rte file. click Ref Plane. 24 On the Design Bar. select Profile Is Flipped. click Edit. Under Constraints. click New ➤ Project. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. 23 Click OK. 848 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Wall. In the New Project Dialog box. click Finish Family. and click Open. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog box. on the Options Bar. click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click OK. The sweep profile application is now complete. 25 On the View toolbar. select Training Files. Under Other. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . 21 Select the sweep profile again and. Draw a wall group 3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the sweep profile and. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. Select the DefaultMetric. on the Options Bar.

8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 4 Draw four walls as shown. 9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. their exact location is not critical. 5 On the View toolbar. verify that Horizontal is selected. click . click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 849 . 7 On the Options Bar.NOTE When you draw the walls.

Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. click Modify. you create a room tag which displays room name. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. you specify the room tag parameters.rfa. Select M_Room Tag.rft. select it. click . 18 In the Dynamic View dialog box. 13 Select the wall sweep and.Host Sweep. and click OK. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Spin [Shift]. . and click Open. In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.Host Sweep : Profile . This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. and area with labels added to extract project data. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. and navigate to the Metric ➤ Templates folder.Host Sweep for Profile. floor and ceiling finish. 12 In the Open dialog box. 17 On the View toolbar. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 11 On the File menu. on the Options Bar. and click Open. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.10 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. under Construction. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 850 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click OK. select Training Files. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to the location of Profile . click Edit/New. select Profile .

Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 851 . and click OK. enter 2mm for Name. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. select Name. click . and click OK. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 13 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Label. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Name dialog box. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Label. click Duplicate. clear Underline. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Ceiling Finish. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. select Underline. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Area. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 7 In the Type properties dialog box. 17 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and click OK. select Label : 2mm. click OK. and click OK. select Floor Finish.

Select Generic Annotation. 852 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rft. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. The new room tag is now ready for use. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. select Training Files. notice that there is only one view available. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. click . Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.rfa. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Open.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF.

click . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 853 . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.

10 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. select North Line. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. in the North Line row. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK.rfa. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. click Modify. click Modify. select 3 for Line Weight. and select the upper vertical line. click New. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Modify. Training North Arrow. enter North Line for Name. click Object Styles. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 854 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

and click Open. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click OK. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. and click Open. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family | 855 . 7 On the File menu. click New ➤ Titleblock. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Symbol. 10 In the Type Selector. select it. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. click Browse. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. 5 Click OK. select Training Files. and your project data. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. select Training North Arrow.rfa. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet.Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. text. select A1 metric.rte file. Select the DefaultMetric. 12 On the Design Bar. graphics. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and labels. The titleblock has linework. click Modify. In the New Project Dialog box. 8 In the Open dialog box. click Sheet. click New ➤ Project. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. Dataset ■ On the File menu.

click Lines. click . select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. and click to draw a new vertical line. 856 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter 140 for Offset. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. . 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.■ In the left pane of the New dialog box. Select A0 metric. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 3 On the Options Bar. and click . and click Open. and enter -25 for Offset. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.rft.

and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 857 . 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select Title Blocks.11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. click Lines. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. press CTRL. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. click . 17 On the Options Bar. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. enter 30 for Offset. 16 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. and enter 20 for Offset. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.

26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 2 In the Open dialog box. select Company Logo. 4 Zoom in on the logo. and click Open. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. The titleblock linework is now complete.jpg. navigate to Training Files/Common. text notes. click Modify. and labels to your titleblock. you add a company logo. 858 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Image.25 On the Design Bar. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown.

Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. click Text. 11 Click OK twice. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. under Text. and add an address and phone number as shown. 9 In the Name dialog box. enter 10 for Text Size. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. click . 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and select Bold. in the text box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Text : 8mm. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and click OK. enter 10mm Bold for Name. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 859 . click Edit/New. click Duplicate.

and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar.Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and select the consultant text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. click Text. and select the last text note. 17 On the Design Bar. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the drag handle. click Modify. Add consultant name. address. and drag the text note down as shown. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Modify. 860 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. click .23 On the Edit toolbar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. select Constrain and Multiple. 27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 24 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 861 .

Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Date:. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 32 In the Name dialog box. click Text. and enter Checked By:. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. enter 5mm for Name. 862 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 34 Click OK twice. enter 5 for Text Size. select Text : 5mm. and enter Sheet Number:. and enter Drawn By:. and click OK. under Text.

42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. click Label.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Project Issue Date. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 863 .

and click OK. 864 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. select Sheet Number. enter 15 for Text Size. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. click Label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. click Edit/New. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Project Number. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. click . click Center and Middle. under Text. select Drawn By. enter 15mm Label for Name. and click to specify the label location. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 59 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. and click OK. 50 On the Options Bar. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 53 In the Name dialog box. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 55 Click OK twice. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. select Label : 15mm Label. and click OK.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Client Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Project Name. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click Label. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 865 . 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field.

click Sheet. Select the DefaultMetric. 73 In the Name dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Left and Middle. select 4mm Label. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click Browse.rfa. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and click OK. click Edit/New. 5 In the Open dialog box. click New ➤ Project. 77 On the Options Bar. and labels are now complete. select Training Files. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The titleblock graphics. In the New Project Dialog box. and click Open. enter 4mm Label. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select it.rte file. and click OK. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. under Text. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click . click Duplicate. click OK. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Load.rfa file. and click Open. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.70 On the Options Bar. text. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 866 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 4 for Text Size. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. click Modify. 75 Click OK twice. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 80 On the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. select File Path. Navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project.

Enter In Progress for Project Status. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 14 Click OK. click Modify and select the titleblock. under Other. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. enter Name for Drawn By. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. click Project Information. 12 On the Settings menu. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 867 . Enter Jane Smith for Client Name.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. Enter Office Building for Project Name. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. click .

Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. and click Open. select Training and navigate to the Common folder.rvt. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. click Orient ➤ Southeast. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. 868 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. set the Area to Square meters. Set the Length units to millimeters. click Project Units. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. on the Settings menu. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. click Open. and set the suffix to None. To change the units of measurement to meters. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Select c_Pantheon.

Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 7 On the Design Bar.Next. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. expand Views (all). and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. enter Dome for Name. and click Open View. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Create. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 869 . 5 In the Name dialog box. and double-click South. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. select Section: Wall Section . select Roofs for Family Category. expand Elevations.Center. click Set Work Plane. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. select Pick a Plane. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box.

870 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 15 On the Options Bar. click . click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.The center wall section view is displayed. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Axis. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

click . 19 On the Options Bar. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.17 Move the cursor out. and select Chain. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 871 . The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 872 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click . click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. click Lines.

Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. click . click and select Chain. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 873 .29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click Lines.

and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. click Finish Family. click Create. under Materials and Finishes. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click for Material. 41 On the Design Bar. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Concrete . 874 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 40 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Materials dialog box.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. click Revolution Properties. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise.35 Select the interior face of the wall. click . and click OK. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click OK.

and click OK. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Floors for Family Category.2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Axis. click . select Pick a Plane. 3 In the Name dialog box. 11 On the Options Bar. select Section: Wall Section . 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. enter Concave Floor for Name.Center. and click Open View. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 875 . and click OK. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Set Work Plane. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. double-click South. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar.

17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. click .O. 876 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. Footing level line and the axis. click Lines.

Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 877 . click Finish Family. click for Material. 22 In the Materials dialog box. select Cobblestone for Name. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. double-click 3D Section View.O. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.O. 24 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.18 Specify the intersection of the T. click OK.

878 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

In exercises that become increasingly complex. formula-based parameters. In this case. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. and detail level controls.Parametric Component Design Techniques 18 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. 879 . you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. The truss also has multiple types. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. assigned subcatecories. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. methodology. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you will understand the process. During this tutorial. not specifically how to make a floor truss. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit MEP 2008.

you should avoid over-designing the component. In this case. and structural walls.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. it is not the best solution. In this case. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. a generic floor-based component might work. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. For every complexity added to a family. this must be a structural beam component. and also works intuitively with them. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. Take this into consideration during your design planning. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. For training purposes. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Although this solution is possible. Two types should be created. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. It should also be an available option within a beam system. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. you determine the requirements of the new component. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. In this lesson. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. beams. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In addition. NOTE When creating a new family. In the next exercise. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 880 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. the planning stage and questions may differ. such as wood type. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 881. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Depending on the family you are designing. Selecting the Family Template | 881 . In the previous exercise. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. In addition. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. 4 Continue with the next exercise. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. would require Instance or Type parameters.

However. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. 4 Scroll through the various template options. scroll to the structural framing templates. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. notice the preview. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. In addition. On the right side of the New dialog box. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. for example: wall based or floor based. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. Like most generic family templates. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 6 In the New dialog box. this is where you access family templates. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Select it so that the preview displays. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. There are two structural framing templates provided. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.rft.rft 882 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Usually. you will access them from the Training Files folder.

Complex and Trusses. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Floor Plan: Ref. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.Beams and Braces. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. This template is the best starting point for the new family. 10 Maximize the view.rft and notice the preview. spacing. and notice the preview. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. it is not the best starting point for the beam family.rft. Level.Complex and Trusses. Because of its simplicity. Floor Plan: Ref. ■ Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces. and display functions required by structural beams.rft to open it. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 883 .

under Floor Plans. Reference Plane: Left. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Therefore. double-click Ref. Level. 12 In the Project Browser. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. double-click View 1. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. 11 In the Project Browser.In this view. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. you add the reference planes. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 884. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. you add reference planes to the beam design. under Elevations. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. however. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. 884 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views. Like many templates. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. lines. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. double-click Front. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it.

The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. In the project plan view image below. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 885 . notice the location of the beam extents. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. In the image below.

5 On the Edit Toolbar. click . you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. click Ref Plane. 886 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. In a later exercise. Before adding new reference planes. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.

click . When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. double-click Front. click on the Edit toolbar. click to place it. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 14 On the Options Bar. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. To do this. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. and select the Level: Ref. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. select the lower horizontal reference plane. Level. Level as the mirror axis.Add ref. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click Ref Plane. Adding Reference Planes | 887 . This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane. under Elevations. Level. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords.

click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Before you move on to the next exercise. click to place it as shown. 888 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. click to place it as shown. 19 On the Options Bar.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it.

20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). specify an Offset of 238 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Adding Reference Planes | 889 . 22 On the Options Bar. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. which you do in the next exercise. Level. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. double-click Ref. under Floor Plans. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. click to place it as shown. 24 In the Project Browser. click to place it as shown. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view.

NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. Wood Floor Truss. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 27 In the Save As dialog box. After adding the dimension. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Make sure you remember where you saved it. click Dimension. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 890 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. and click Save. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rfa. click Modify. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. navigate to the folder of your choice. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 890. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 2 On the Options Bar. This tool is the aligned dimension tool.25 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown.

Place the dimension as shown. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 891 . 9 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. place the dimension to the left as shown. double-click Front. 4 On the Design Bar. the Center reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. click Dimension.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. click Modify. under Elevations. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 6 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. click Dimension.

13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Level. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. and place it below the dimension you added previously. 892 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

In the next exercise. In addition.Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. dimensions. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 893 . you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. you will add additional reference planes. add two dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. Throughout the tutorial. and constraints as needed. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 894. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

If the component has material that varies per component. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. consider making it a type parameter. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature.rfa. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. under Floor Plans. consider making it an instance parameter. Wood Floor Truss. it becomes a parameter. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. double-click Ref. When you design a new family. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. consider making it a type parameter. Level. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. Select Type. In this exercise.Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. ■ Click OK. enter Chord Width for Name. 894 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. select Add parameter for Label. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. 3 On the Options Bar. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser.

Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. select Add parameter for Label. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Type. Select Type. under Elevations.Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. select Family parameter. Creating New Length Parameters | 895 . double-click Front. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 7 On the Options Bar. enter Depth for Name.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. 16 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. Under Parameter Data. 896 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter Chord Thickness for Name. Click OK. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. select Chord Thickness for Label.Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. In the Family Types dialog box. Flexing the Component Model | 897 . When you load this family into a project. This is not limited to length parameters. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding or modifying a parameter. Dimensions. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. If you add a new material parameter. click Family Types. 20 On the File menu. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. 19 Click Cancel. click Save. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. “Flexing the Component Model” on page 897.

When you open the Family Types dialog. and click Apply. or ■ Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog box. Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. 898 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family.rfa. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. After you verify this. Wood Floor Truss. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. enter 600 mm for Depth. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. under Dimensions. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. In this exercise. Nesting a component. you can drag it to the opposing corner. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained.■ ■ ■ Adding a new constraint. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. When you flex a family. click Family Types.

and click Apply. Click OK. Flexing the Component Model | 899 . Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. Click Apply. In addition. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. Level.Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth.

3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 900. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. After flexing the design. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. 6 On the File menu. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. 6 On the Options Bar. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Reference Plane: Member Left. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends.rfa. under Elevations. you align and lock their position. click Name. click Save. double-click Left. click . 900 | Chapter 18 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After adding the chords. Wood Floor Truss. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. and select Lock. click Lines. 5 On the Design Bar. After creating the extrusions. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser.When working within the Family Editor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click . click the part of the line you want to keep. 13 On the Tools toolbar. the lines will no longer overlap. click . 8 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. click . NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 10 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. When using the Trim tool. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. 14 Select